Pali Roots in Saddaniti by Venerable U Silananda1

PALI ROOTS
IN
SADDANTI
Pali Roots in
Saddanti Dhtu-Ml
compared with
Pinya-Dhtupha
VENERABLE U SILANANDA
EDITOR
U NANDISENA
Pali Roots in Saddanti 2001, Venerable U Silananda
Electronic version 1.0
Last updated: Monday, January 21, 2002

iv
CONTENTS
Introduction ........................................ v-xiii
Guide to Pali Roots .................. xiv-xvi
Abbreviations .......................... xvii
B i b l i o g r a p h y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii-xxi
Pali Roots in Saddanti Dhtu-Ml

compared with Piniya-Dhtupha ...... 1-185
Meaning of Pali Roots ............... 186-258
Index...................................... 259-260
Author................................................ 261
iv
v
INTRODUCTION
Why this book?
Even the author of Saddanti Dhtuml who often criticized those who wrote their works
following the style of Sanskrit relied on the Pinya Dhtupha when he wrote his Saddanti
Dhtuml. Ever since I found this statement while I was still a novice of about 18 years of age,
I had wanted to compare Saddanti Dhtuml with Pinya Dhtupha, but my knowledge of
Sanskrit was rather elementary at that time and also I could not get a copy of the Dhtupha.
Even later when my knowledge of Sanskrit improved and I got hold of a copy of the Dhtupha,
being occupied with my duties and responsibilities at the Sixth Buddhist Council, I was unable to
make a comparative study of the roots in both books. But in 1975 I got a chance to make that
study. In the course of my study I found or discovered many good points and not so good points
in the book. I felt that I should share my findings with all those who were interested in Saddanti
and Pi roots. So in 1976 I wrote a book in Burmese presenting my findings, and it was
published in Burma in 1977. In my book I explained in detail some of my findings and as an
appendix to the book I included the comparison of roots in Dhtuml with those in Dhtupha
in tabular form. The comparison which has been transliterated from the Burmese Pali into
Romanized Pali together with a translation of the meaning of the roots into English and Spanish
in the tabular form given in the next section of this book is taken from my book in Burmese
with minor changes here and there.
Pi and Sanskrit
Both Pi and Sanskrit are now ancient languages. They belong to the Indo-Aryan family of
languages. Sanskrit is the language of what is now known as Hinduism and Pi is the language
of Theravda Buddhism. Among the two, Sanskrit (or at least the older Vedic Sanskrit) is
definitely older than Pli, since we know from comparative study of the two languages that the
majority of the Pli words are derived from Sanskrit. Although the language we now find in the
v
Introduction vi
Theravda Buddhist literature is called Pi, this name was never used in the Texts,
Commentaries and Subcommentaries to refer to this language. The names they used are
1. Ariyaka (Vinaya Piaka, i. 33, Samantapsdik, i. 220),

2. Dhammanirutti and Sabhvanirutti (Vibhaga, 307, Sammohavinodan, 370-1),
3. Mgadhabhs (Samantapsdik, i. 220),
4. Mgadhik bhs (Paisambhidmagga Ahakath, i. 5),
5. Tantibhs (Dhammapada Ahakath, i. 2),
6. Mlabhs (Paisambhidmagga Ahakath, i. 5, Mahvasa, 37, 244), and
7. Pakatibhs (Vajirabuddhi k, 291, Sratthadpan k, iii. 6).
All treatises in Pli of grammar, lexicography, rhetoric and prosody were based on older
Sanskrit counterparts. Thus we know that Kaccyana, the Pi grammar was based on the
Sanskrit grammar called Ktantra or Kalpa Vykaraa; the Pi grammar of Moggallna was
based on Cndra Vykaraa; the Abhidhnappadpik, a Pi lexicon, was based on
Amarakoa; the Pi Subodhlakra was based on Kvydara and the Pli Vuttodaya was
based on Vttaratnkara.
Saddanti and its Author
Saddanti is the most comprehensive Pi grammar ever written. Its author was the Venerable
Aggavasa of Arimaddana (modern Pagan or Bagan) in Myanmar. Although we do not know
his date, the available internal and external evidence shows that he must have lived in late 12th
century A. D. or early 13th century A. D. He wrote his grammar in three parts. The first part,
called Padaml, deals with conjugation of the root bh, the declension of the words formed
with the root bh, and declension of nouns and exposition thereof in great detail. The second
part, Dhtuml, deals with roots, their meanings, words formed with the roots and detailed
explanation. It also gives us the examples of the roots from the Texts and Commentaries as
much as possible. The third part is called Suttaml. It is definitely based on the grammar of
Kaccyana although it is far more comprehensive than Kaccyana. It is interesting to note that
vi
Introduction vii
the eighth chapter of this grammar deals with the four parts of speech in Pi, and in the ninth
and last chapter the author dealt with the style of the language in the Texts, Commentaries,
Subcommentaries and other treatises. Towards the end of this chapter he mentioned the three
kinds of kaths (talks, taken from the Anuk to Kathvatthu), five members of syllogism, 32
Tantrayuttis (ways of understanding treatises), all in some detail.
Since Saddanti is the most comprehensive of the Pi grammars, and is based essentially on
the Pi literature, the Texts, Commentaries, Subcommentaries, etc., Pi scholars of Myanmar
and Sri Lanka had and still have great respect for it. The following is an excerpt from the History
of Buddhas Religion, which is the translation of a Pi work called Ssanavasa which is
essentially a translation of the older work in Myanmar language, called Ssanlakra.
And at that time the fame that the people of the city of Arimaddana, who were well-
posted in grammar were many, spread as far as the island of Lak. So those
belonging to the island of Shala who knew grammar well being anxious to examine (it)
[Saddanti] went to the city of Arimaddana. Then the monks who lived in the city of
Arimaddana showed (them) the book Saddanti.
And when those belonged to the island of Shala had seen it and thought thus: In
the subject of grammar there is no book like this in the island of Shala, even the
detailed analysis as contained in this book we do not know, they spoke highly in
various ways. The account has not been lost up to this day. (History of Buddhas
Religion, 81.)
Pi and Sanskrit roots
Roots are called dhtu in both Sanskrit and Pi. It means an essential and basic element of a
word. It is defined as that which holds its own meaning and meaning of others as well.1 Since it
1 Dht iti ken atthena dhtu? Sakattham pi dhret ti dhtu; atthtisayayogato parattham pi dhret ti
dhtu. Saddantipadaml, 2. There are other definitions also.
vii
Introduction viii
is an essential and basic part of a word, most words in Pi as well as in Sanskrit are made up
of a dhtu and a paccaya (suffix). The word dhtu itself is made up of the root dh and the
suffix tu. The words pacati, paccati, pacyate, pacita, pakka, pacitu, pacitv, pacanta,
pacamna are all made up with the root paca with different suffixes and terminations. So we
can easily see the root of the words when we compare the different forms they take in different
places.
For the convenience of those who studied the language, the authors of old compiled all the
available dhtus from the language in a list, and that list came to be known as Dhtupha. In
that list the meanings of the roots were also given along with the roots. When they gave the
meanings they gave following the tradition of giving the meanings in the locative case, as bh
sattya, the root bh is in the sense of existing, and so on. They also divide the roots into
groups called Gaas, and roots belonging to a particular group share the same conjugational
sign called vikaraa. Thus the roots bh and paca belong to the same group and so they share
the vikaraa a. When words are formed, especially the finite verbs, these vikaraas are
employed after the roots and before the terminations. Thus, for instance, when the termination
ti has been put after the root bh, and the vikaraa a is employed after it, the necessary
changes follow until the word bhavati is formed (see Guide to Pali Roots for a detailed
explanation).
In the Pinya Dhtupha the Sanskrit roots are divided into ten groups, and they have their
own vikaraas as follows:
GAA VIKARAA
1. Bhvdi Gaa ap (a)

2. Addi Gaa ap, then elided (zero)
3. Juhotydi Gaa lu, then elided (zero)
4. Divdi Gaa yan (ya)
5. Svdi Gaa nu (nu)
6. Tuddi Gaa a (a)
viii
Introduction ix
GAA VIKARAA
7. Rudhdi Gaa nam (nam)

8. Tandi Gaa u (u)
9. Krydi Gaa n (n)
10. Curdi Gaa ic (i)
But in Pi, roots are divided into 7 or 8 Gaas as follows:
GAA VIKARAA
1. Bhvdi Gaa a
2. Rudhdi Gaa +a
3. Divdi Gaa ya
4. Svdi Gaa u, , u
5. Kiydi Gaa n
6. Gahdi Gaa ppa, h
7. Tandi Gaa o, yir
8. Curdi Gaa e, aya
Because Kaccyana has the sutta Gahdito ppa-h, Saddanti took it to be indicative of the
separate Gaa, Gahdi, and so according to Saddanti there are 8 Gaas in Pi. But
Rpasiddhi, though it presents suttas in Kaccyana but in a different order, does not take that
sutta to indicate a separate Gaa. So according to Rpasiddhi there are only 7 Gaas in Pi,
including the root gaha in Kiydi Gaa. Rpasiddhi also includes the three GaasAddi,
Juhotydi and Tuddiin the Bhvdi Gaa.
Saddanti Dhtuml
Saddanti Dhtuml is not just a list of Pi roots and their meanings. It also gives the examples
taken from the Pli Texts and the Commentaries as much as possible and detailed
explanations, often lengthy. It also gives us the additional information mostly culled from the
ix
Introduction x
Texts and the Commentaries. So the form of presentation in it is: root, its meaning, example/s,
explanation and additional information. Although it divides the roots into eight Gaas, within
each Gaa, the roots are given in alphabetical order of the end letters. In alphabetizing the roots
it ignores the end vowels. So in it the root kakkha, for example, is included in the roots ending
in the letter kh, and rudhi in those ending in dh.
In Pi grammatical treatises such as N ysa and Rpasiddhi (both commentaries on

Kaccyanas grammar) as in the Sanskrit treatises, most roots are shown with the vowel at the
end, as paca, gamu, divu, rudhi, kara, cura, etc. In Kaccyana as well as in Saddanti there is a
sutta by which the elision of that last vowel is enjoined. But Moggallna Thera who was the
author of Moggallna grammar thinks that these end vowels are just indicatory letters put for
some purpose and so there is no need to have a sutta for their elision. In his opinion they are
assumed non-existent when words are formed.
In Sanskrit dhtuphas, roots are also shown with letters to indicate some peculiar feature
relating to them. Knowledge of these indicatory letters is very helpful when reading the
dhtuphas. I would like to refer the reader to the book called Dhturpacandrik for the
explanation of the letters.
The result of that study is presented in the next section. As a result of my study I came to have
more admiration for the author who achieved such a difficult task. His was not the time of
computers, nor of printed books. He had to use the manuscripts where, to save space, no
spaces were used between words.
Sothelinesreadlikethissentenceinthosemanuscripts. To make matters worse these manuscripts

were full of scribal errors that were inevitable under the circumstances. Since the author had to
rely on such imperfect manuscripts, it is no wonder that errors would creep in into his work. That
is why I came to find errors in the book.
x
Introduction xi
These errors can be classified as follows:
1. Those apparently made by the author himself, and

2. Those apparently made by the scribes.
The first kind of errors can be divided into 1) those regarding roots, 2) those regarding meanings
of roots, 3) those regarding both, 4) those regarding explanations given for meanings of roots,
and 5) those made through misunderstanding of the Dhtupha. I cannot go into details about
these errors. I can only refer the readers to a few roots where they can see for themselves.
For type-1 errors: dhakhi, ghu abhigamane, kuda-khuda-guda, d sandpane, labha

bhaane, sulla sajjane, etc.
For type-2 errors: muccha mohamucchsu, ucha pipsya, khaa kase, kadi velambe,
gdha paihnissayagandhesu, etc.
For type-3 errors: uda mode kya ca, chadi ujjhane, hasu lige, hu pasajjakarae, etc.
For type-4 errors: dikkha muiyopanayananiyabbatdesesu, maci dhraucchya-

pjanesu, nida neda kucchsannikarisesu, tla nikkarse, etc.
For type-5 errors: In the Dhtupha sentences like bh sattym are called dhtustras,
i.e., they give the root and the meaning. There are other stras that are called
Gaastras. They indicate a particular root belongs to a certain group, so they are not to
be taken as giving just the root and its meaning. At least there are three such Gaastras
in the Dhtupha, namely, (i) amo darane, (ii) yamo pariveane and (iii) hantyarth
ca which the author mistook as dhtustras and treated as such. (See sama adassane,
yama parivesane and ghaa saghe hantytthe ca in Saddanti.)
xi
Introduction xii
The second kind of errors can be divided into 1) those in roots, 2) those in meanings, and 3)
those in both. These errors were made because in the manuscripts the Burmese letters c and
v, dh and v, m and dh, th and dh, p and s, d and r, s and h, v and ta look very
similar to each other and so it is very easy to read one for the other.
For type-1 errors: byca, seca, khija, kuhi, pa; hildi, ddhi, ubbi, tubbi, phyi (error in
vowels); vaca (v for c), vakka (v for dh), masa (m for dh); dhaka (dh for th), panu (p for s),
dica (d for r), sha balakkre (s for ha), vsi (v for ta), haa (h for s),etc.
For type-2 errors: cajja jacca paribhsanavajjanesu (v for t), bhaa bhattiya (tt for t),
ghura abhimatthasaddesu (abhimattha for bhmattha), santa mappayoge ( for s), etc.
For type-3 errors: buja vajiranibbese for phujja vajiranipphese, nidapi nidampane for nirapi
nirampane, cevi cetantulye for vev vetin tulye.
* * * * *
Regarding the roots and their meanings, we faithfully follow the Six Buddhist Council Edition of
Saddanti Dhtuml although in some cases the reading in Smiths edition is preferable.
Following the original tradition, translation of the meanings of the roots is given in verbal nouns
in locative case as, e. g., kara karane = the root kara is in the sense of doing or making, and
not as in modern times as, e. g., = kara is in the sense of to go.
In order to inform those who are not familiar with the traditional study of Pali grammar,
especially the formation of words, we give sample procedures of forming a verb and a noun
elsewhere in this introduction (Guide to Pali Roots).
I prepared this book with the able help of Venerable U Nandisena, an Argentine-born Buddhist
monk who has been my student for many years. The Spanish translation was also made by him
xii
Introduction xiii
because I do not know Spanish. I cannot thank him enough for assisting me in preparing this
book and for translating it into Spanish. Without him this book would not have been prepared at
all.
In the near future I intend to bring out my detailed study of some roots in Saddanti Dhtuml
compared with those in Pinya Dhtupha.
U Silananda
Dhammananda Vihara
Half Moon Bay, CA, USA.
Wednesday, August 04, 1999
xiii
xiv
GUIDE TO PALI ROOTS
Conjugational Groups
# GROUP TOTAL CONJUGATIONAL REMARKS

(GAA) ROOTS SIGN (VIKARAA)
I BHVDIGAA 1110 a ..........
II RUDHDIGAA 18 -a to be inserted after first

syllable
III DIVDIGAA 104 ya ..........
IV SVDIGAA 30 u, , u is not an indicatory letter
V KIYDIGAA 32 n ..........
VI GAHDIGAA 10 ppa, h ..........
VII TANDIGAA 14 o, yira ..........
VIII CURDIGAA 399 e, aya indicates strengthening of

vowel of 1st syllable if not al-
ready long or followed by
double consonant
xiv
Guide to Pali Roots xv
Guide to Pali Roots
ROOT AND ROOT MEANING FROM

PINYA-DHTUPHA (PD)
ROOT AND MEANING FROM ROOT GROUP AND
SADDANTI-DHTUML (SD) PAGE # FROM SD
ROOT GROUP AND
ROOT # FROM PD
English Spanish
Pali
Pali Root Root Meaning Ref. Sanskrit Root Root Meaning Ref.
raz pali significado de la raz Ref. raz snscrita significado de raz Ref.
asa saghte = accumulating; VIII asa samghte X 371

collecting || acumular; juntar; 348
agregar.
aka kuilagatiya = moving I 12, ak a kuily gatau I 829

crookedly || ir torcidamente. 210
aki lakkhae = marking; mark || I 16 ak i lakae I 87

marca, seal.
aki lakkhae = marking VIII aka pade lakae ca X 382

(saa) || marca, seal. 281
akka thavane = praising (thuti) || VIII ark a stavane, tapane ity X 102
elogiar, alabar. 283 eke
akkha byattisakhtesu = perva- I 22 ak vyptau I 684

ding and telling || difundir;
propagar; penetrar; esparcir y
decir; anunciar.
Note: The dash () separates the various meanings of the Pali root. Here byatti, pervading, is the first meaning,
and sakhta, telling, the second meaning. The parallel bars ( || ) separate the English and Spanish meanings.
xv
Guide to Pali Roots xvi
A ROOT IS A PRIMITIVE ELEMENT OF THE LANGUAJE

PALI ROOTS MAY HAVE 1, 2, OR 3 SYLLABLES
PALI ROOTS CONSIST OF TWO PARTS:
(I) THE ROOT ITSELF AND
(II) AN END VOWEL (DHTVANTA)
ROOT THE END VOWEL IN 2+ SYLLABLE ROOTS IS ELIDED
(DHTU) BEFORE THE CONJUGATIONAL SIGN IS PLACED
ROOTS HAVING I AS END VOWEL INSERT AFTER
THE 1ST SYLLABLE
FORMING FORMING
VERBS NOUNS
# STEPS EXAMPLE # STEPS EXAMPLE
1 PUT DOWN THE ROOT PACA (COOKING-GROUP I) 1 PUT DOWN THE ROOT PACA (COOKING-GROUP I)
Y (GOING-GROUP I, III) 2 ELIDE LAST VOWEL PAC

2 IF ROOT HAS 2 OR MO- PAC 3 PUT SUFFIX AFTER THE PAC + VU (=AKA)
RE SYLLABLES ELIDE ROOT
LAST VOWEL
4 STRENGTHEN THE 1ST PC + AKA
3 PUT THE VERBAL TER- PAC + TI (3A PERS. SG.) VOWEL OF THE ROOT
MINATION (VIBHATTI)
AFTER THE ROOT Y + TI (3A PERS. SG.)
5 END FORMING THE PCAKA (ONE WHO COOKS)
4 PUT CONJUGATIONAL PAC + A + TI STEM
SIGN BETWEEN ROOT
AND INFLECTIONAL Y + A + TI 6 INSERT THE CASE PCAKA + SI (= O)
ENDING TERMINATION
5 END FORMING THE PACATI (HEL/SHE COOKS) 7 END FORMING THE PCAKO (MASC., NOMINATIVE
WORD WORD SINGULAR)
YTI (HE/SHE GOES)
Note: This chart is just an illustration of the process of forming verbs and nouns from the roots. The actual formation of
verbs and nouns may imply additional steps and further grammatical operations.
PALI ALPHABET
a, , i, , u, , e, o, , k, kh, g, gh, , c, ch, j, jh, , , h, , h, , t, th, d, dh, n, p, ph,

b, bh, m, y, r, l, v, s, h, .
xvi
xvii
ABBREVIATIONS
C. Cndra Vykaraa
DP Dhtupha as appended to The Siddhnta Kaumud in
Devangar script
Durga Name of Author
Kalpadruma Kavikalpadruma, Vopadeva, Calcutta, 1904
Kappa-k k to above
Katre Adhyy of Pini, translated by Sumitra M. Katre
Ktantra Kalpavykaraa
K. Krataragi
Maitreyarakita Name of Author
Majar Dhtumajar
Ns. Saddanti-Dhtuml Nissaya
SD Saddanti-Dhtuml
Smith Saddanti-Dhtuml, edited by Helmer Smith
Vasu The Siddhnta Kaumud, Bhaoji Dkita, Vol. I-II, ed-
ited and translated into English by ra Chandra Vasu
xvii
xviii
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Abhidhnappadpik k, Moggallna. Sixth Buddhist Council, Yangon, 1964.

Abhidhnappadpik Sci, Caturagabala. Ratanvd Piakat, Yangon, 1957.
A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, Sir M. Monier-Williams. Motilal Banarsidass 1981.
Adhyy of Pini, translated by Sumitra M. Katre. Motilal Banarsidass 1989.
Blavatra, Dhammakitti, Zabu Meit Swe Press, Yangon, 1938.
Blavatra, Dhammakitti, Icchasaya Pitakat Press, Yangon, 1973.
Cndra Dhtupha, Part of Cndra Vykaraa, Dr. Bruno Liebich, Leipzig, 1902
Dhtupaccaya Dpan, Bhaddanta Varasambodhi Thera. Icchasaya Pitakat Press,
Yangon, 1993.
Dhtu-Pha, The Roots of Language, Stephen R. Hill and Peter G. Harrison. Mun-
shiram Manoharlal 1991.
Dhtvattha Pankone, Ven. U Kumra. Published by Pram Press, Yangon, 1998.
Dhtvattha Sagaha Pi Nissya, U Visuddhcra. Published by Daw Phwar Khin
& Brother U Hla Maung-Samata Press 1952.
Kaccyana-Bykaraa, Kaccyana. Sixth Buddhist Council Edition (Burmese
Script) 1993.
Krataragi , Krasvmin, Ed. Yudhiir Mmasak, Amtasr, India, 2014
Savat.
Niruttidpan, Ledi Sayadaw, edicin del Sexto Concilio Buddhista (1970).
Padarpasiddhi, Buddhappiya. Sixth Buddhist Council Edition (Burmese Script)
1994.
Pali-English Dictionary, Rhys Davids and Stede. Pali Text Society 1992.
Pali Literature and Language, Wilhelm Geiger. University of Calcuta 1956.
Rpasiddhibhsk, U Janaka. Published by New Burma Pitaka Press,
Amarapura. Vol. I 1954 -Vol. II 1957.
xviii
Bibliography xix
Saddantippakaraa-Dhtuml, Aggavasa. Sixth Buddhist Council Edition

(Burmese Script) 1964.
Saddanti-Dhtuml, Aggavasa. Roman Script. Edited by Helmer Smith. Lund,
C. W. K. Gleerup 1929.
Saddanti-Dhtuml Nissya, U But. Sixth Buddhist Council Edition (Burmese
Script) 1979.
The Sanskrit Dhtuphas, G. B. Palsule. University of Poona 1961.
The Siddhnta Kaumud , Bhaoji Dkita, Vol. I-II, edited and translated into
English by ra Chandra Vasu. Motilal Banarsidass 1982.
The Siddhnta Kaumud, Bhattoji Deekshit (Devangar script). Printed and Pub-
lished by Khemraj Shri Krishnadas, Bombay 1909.
xix
1
asa saghte = accumulating; VIII asa samghte X 371

agregar.
aka kuilagatiya = moving I 12, ak a kuily gatau I 829

crookedly || ir torcidamente. 210
aki lakkhae = marking; mark || I 16 ak i lakae I 87

marca, seal.
aki lakkhae = marking (saa) VIII aka pade lakae ca X 382

|| marca, seal. 281
akka thavane = praising (thuti) || VIII ark a stavane, tapane ity X 102
elogiar, alabar. 283 eke
akkha byatti-sakhtesu = pervading I 22 ak vyptau I 684

and telling || difundir;
decir; anunciar.
aga kuilya gatiya = moving I 210 ag a kuily gatau I 830

crookedly || ir torcidamente.
agi gamane = going || ir. I 27 ag i gatyartha I 155
agga kuilagatiya = going I 28 ag a kuily gatau I 830

crookedly || ir torcidamente.
agha ppakarae = doing evil || VIII agh a ppe K.,

hacer el mal. 290 nh 323
acca pjya = venerating; I 30 arc a pjym I 219

honoring || venerar; honrar.
1
2
acca pjya = venerating; VIII arc a pjym X 266

honoring || venerar; honrar. 293
achi yme = stretching; extending I 39 ch i yme I 224

|| abarcar; extender.
aja khepane gatiya ca = I 43 aj a gati-kepaayo I 248

throwing; passing or spending
time and going || arrojar, tirar;
pasar tiempo e ir.
ajja ajjane = procuring; acquiring I 43 arj a arjane I 242

|| obtener; adquirir; procurar.
ajja paisajjane = forming; making VIII arj a prayatne X 186

|| formar; hacer; producir. 295
aca byayagatiya = going to loss I 34 ac u gatau ycane ca I 915

or destruction or ruin vyay a gatau I 930
(vinsagati) || ir hacia
destruccin, prdida o ruina.
acu gati-pjansu = going and I 30 ac u gati-pjanayo I 203

venerating; honoring || ir y
venerar; honrar.
acu visesane = distinguishing || VIII ac u vieae X 198

distinguir; calificar; 292
especificar.
aa gatiya = going || ir. I 53 a a gatau I 317
aa andare = disrespect || falta de VIII a a andare X 25

respeto. 296
2
3
ahi gatiya = going || ir. I 57 ah i gatau I 280
aa abhiyoge = engaging in a I 58 a a abhiyoge I 371

lawsuit || entablar un pleito.
aa sadde = making sound || I 59 a a abdrtha I 471

producir sonido.
ata staccagamane = going I 64 at a statyagamane I 38

constantly (nirantaragamana)
|| ir continuamente.
ati bandhane = binding || atadura; I 64, at i bandhane I 62

ligazn; ligar; atar. 209
attha ycanya = begging || VIII artha upaycym X 357

mendigar (pedir comida). 311
adi bandhane = binding || atadura; I 86, at i bandhane I 62

ligazn; ligar; atar. 209 ad i bandhane I 63
adda gatiya ycane ca = going I 86 ard a avyakte abde I 56

and begging || ir y mendigar gatau ycane ca
(pedir comida).
adda hisya = hurting || daar; VIII ard a hisym X 285

lastimar; herir. 314
ana pane = breathing (sasana) || I 115 an a prane II 61

respirar.
anu-rudha kme = desire; wish (icch) || III ano rudh a kme IV 65

deseo. 232
3
4
anu-vi-dh anukarae = imitating || III ......

imitar. 232
antara-dh adassane = not seeing; III ......

disappearance || desaparicin; 228
ausencia; no ver.
andha dihpasahre = removing VIII andha dyupaghte, X 380

of sight; destruction of sight 320 upasahre ity anye
(cakkhusaitya dihiy dyupasahre
upasahro, apanayana (K.)
vinso v) || eliminacin de la
vista (perder la vista).
apa ppue = reaching || alcanzar; IV ......

realizar; llegar, arribar. 245
appa ppue = reaching || alcanzar; VII ......

abi sadde = making sound || I 124 ab i abde I 403

producir sonido.
abba gatiya hisya ca = going I 123 arv a hisym I 615

and hurting || ir y daar;
lastimar; herir.
abbha gatiya = going || ir. I 125 abhr a gatyartha I 588
abhi sadde = making sound || I 127 abh i abde I 411

producir sonido.
ama gatimhi = going || ir. I 132 am a gatydiu I 493
4
5
ama roge = ailing; illness || VIII am a roge X 180

enfermedad; dolencia. 333
aya gatiya = going || ir. I 139 ay a gatau I 503
ara gatiya = going || ir. I 158 gati-prpaayo I 983
araha pjya = venerating; I 196 arh a pjym I 776

araha pjya = venerating; VIII arh a pjym X 192

honoring || venerar; honrar. 349 X 287
ala bhsane = ornamenting; I 162 al a bhaa-parypti- I 548

decorating || ornamentar; vraeu
decorar; adornar.
ava plane = protecting || proteger; I 170 ava rakaa-gati-knti- I 631

cuidar. prti-tpty-avagama-
pravea-ravaa-
svmyartha-ycana-
kriyecch-dpty-
avpty-ligana-
hisdna-bhga-
vddhiu
asa gatiya dity-dnesu ca = I 184 as a gati-dpty-dneu I 934

going, shining and taking;
seizing; grasping || ir; brillar y
tomar; asir, agarrar.
asa bhuvi = being; existing || ser; I 185 as a bhuvi II 56

existir.
5
6
asa bhojane = eating || comer. V a a bhojane IX 51

255
asu khepe = throwing (khipana) || III as u kepae IV 100

arrojar, tirar; lanzar; descartar. 239
asu bypane = pervading || IV a vyptau saghte ca V 18

difundir; propagar; penetrar; 246
esparcir.
ahi gatiya = going || ir. I 196 ah i gatau I 666
aa uggame = rising; going up || I 200 a a udyame I 380

surgir; salir; aparecer.
-gamu sam adhivsane = waiting || VIII ...... see Vrtika of Pini

esperar (lit. tener poca 334 1.3.21
paciencia).
-camu dhovane = washing || lavar; VIII ......

limpiar. 331
-d gahae = taking || tomar. III ......

74,
226
pa bypane = pervading || IV p vyptau V 14

difundir; propagar; penetrar; 245
esparcir.
pu lambane = hanging || colgar. VIII p lambhane X 295

327
-bhuja reflecting || reflexionar, I 48 .......

pensar.
6
7
-rabha his-karaa-vyamanesu = I 128 ......

hurting; doing and striving ||
daar; lastimar; herir; hacer y
esforzar(se).
sa upavesane = sitting (nisdana) I 187 s a upaveane II 11

|| sentarse, estar sentado.
sisi icchya = wishing; desiring I 183 a asi icchym I 660

|| desear.
i gatiya = going || ir. I1 i gatau II 36
i ajjhayane = reciting; learning I 12 i adhyayane II 37

(uccraa, sikkhana) || recitar;
aprender; estudiar.
ikkha dassan-akesu = seeing and I 26 k a darane I 641

marking || ver y marcar.
ikhi gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 ikh i gatyartha I 145
igi gamane = going || ir. I 27 ig i gatyartha I 163
ia gatiya = going || ir. I 53 i a gatau I 340
iu gatiya = going || ir. VII u gatau VIII 5

263
idi paramissariye = supremacy || I 87 id i paramaivarye I 64

supremaca; superioridad.
idha vuddhiya = increasing; III dh u vddhau IV 135

growing || crecer; aumentar. 231
7
8
ila kampane = trembling || I 168 il a svapna-prekaayo; VI 65

temblar; vibrar. svapna-kepaayo
(K.)
ila gatiya = going || ir. I 169 il a gatau C. 6.64
ila perae = crushing; grinding || VIII il a prerae X 119

aplastar; moler; triturar. 343
isa uche = gleaning || espigar. I 173 a uche I 715
isa pariyesane = searching; I 190 ......

seeking || buscar.
isa abhikkhae = doing continu- V i a bhkye IX 53

ously || hacer continuamente. 256
isi gatiya = going || ir. I 189 gatau VI 7
isu icchya = wishing; desiring I 190 i a icchym VI 59

|| desear.
issa issya = jealously; envy || I 172 ry a ryrtha I 544

envidia.
ia1 thavane = praising; extolling || VIII a stutau X 129

elogiar, alabar. 350
ja gatiya = going || ir. I 44 j a gati-kutsanayo I 196

(gatau-C.)
1
a (Smith).
8
9
d sandpane = shining; showing VIII chd sadpane X 277

clearly || brillar; exponer, 314
mostrar claramente.
ra vacane gati-kampanesu ca = I 154 r a gatau kampane ca II 8

saying; going and trembling ||
decir; ir y temblar; vibrar.
ra khepane = throwing; casting || VIII r a kepe X 268

arrojar, tirar; lanzar; descartar. 336
sa his-gati-dassanesu = I 179 a gati-his-daraneu I 642

hurting, going and seeing ||
daar; lastimar; herir; ir y ver.
sa issariye = supremacy; I 187 a aivarye II 10

domination (issarabhva) ||
supremaca; superioridad;
dominio.
ha cetya = striving; exerting; I 196 h a ceym I 663

urging || esforzar(se); incitar,
instigar.
a thutiya = praising || elogiar; I 201 a stutau II 9

alabar.
u sadde = making sound || I 12, u abde I 1001

producir sonido. 209
ukkha secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 23 uk a secane I 687

rociar, asperjar; vertir.
ukha gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 ukh a gatyartha I 132
9
10
uca samavye = combination; III uc a samavye IV 114

coming together || 223
combinacin; juntarse,
reunirse.
ucha pipsya = thirst || sed. I 39 uch i vivse I 231
uchi2 uche = searching; seeking I 39 uch i uche I 230

(pariyesana) || buscar. VI 13
uju ajjave = straightness; rectitude I 47 ubj a rjave VI 20

(ujubhva) || rectitud;
honestidad.
ujjha ussagge = throwing away; I 50 ujjh a utsarge VI 21

rejection (chaana) || arrojar;
tirar; descartar; rechazar;
desechar.
uha upaghte = hurting; injuring; I 56 uh a upaghte I 361

killing || herir; lastimar; matar.
uda karsossagge mode kya ca I 93 urd a purotsarge mne I 1026

= releasing excrement; kry ca
rejoicing and sporting;
playing || evacuar excremento;
regocijo, alegra; y jugar.
udi pasava-kiledanesu = flowing II und kledane VII 20

(sandana) and wetness; 215
moistness (tintat) || fluir y
humedad.
2
uchi (Smith).
10
11
uddhasa uche = seeking; searching V udhras a uche IX 52

(pariyesana) || buscar. 255
upa3 pajjane = being; existing || ser; VIII ......

existir. 326
ubbi4 hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 123 urv hisrtha I 600

lastimar; herir.
ubbha prae = filling || llenar; I 129 ......

completar.
ubha prae = filling || llenar; I 129 ubh a prae VI 32

completar.
umbha prae = filling || llenar; I 129 umbh a prae VI 32

completar.
usa5 rujya = paining; afflicting || I 173 a rujym I 714

doler; afligir.
usa dhe = heat (uha) || calor. VI ......

258
usu upadhe = burning || quemar; I 174 u u dhe I 727

arder.
na parihniya = loss; decrease || VIII na parihe X 342

prdida; disminucin; 321
reduccin.
3
apa suggested by Smith (page 553). apa sugerido por Smith (pg. 553).
4
ubb (Smith).
5
sa (Smith).
11
12
y tantasantne = weaving; I 143 y i tantusatne I 512

sewing || tejer; entrelazar;
coser.
ha vitakke = thinking; reflecting I 197 h a vitarke I 679

|| pensar; reflexionar.
eja kampane = trembling || I 43 ej kampane I 253

temblar; vibrar.
eja dittiya = shining || brillar. I 45 ej dptau I 192
eha vibdhya = oppressing; I 57 eh a vibdhym I 286

harming || oprimir; obstruir;
daar, lastimar.
edha vuddhiya lbhe ca = I 108 edh a vddhau I2

increasing, growing and
gaining, acquiring || crecer;
aumentar y adquirir; ganar;
obtener.
esa buddhiya = knowing || I 179 ......

conocer; comprender.
esu gatiya = going || ir. I 181, e gatau I 649

188
okha sosanlamatthesu = making I 21 okh oalamarthayo I 125

dry and to be able; to suffice;
to adorn; to prevent || secar y
ser capaz, poder; ser
suficiente; adornar; prevenir.
12
13
oa apanayane = removing || I 60 o apanayane I 482

remover (quitar algo de un
lugar).
opa nihubhane = spitting (khea- I 121 ......

ptana) || escupir.
opa thapane = placing; putting || VIII ......

colocar; poner. 327
opuji vilimpane = anointing; I 49 ......

smearing || ungir; untar;
manchar.
om smatthiye = ability I 131 ......

(samatthabhva) || habilidad;
capacidad.
oha cge = giving up; I 198 o h k tyge? III 8

abandonment || dejar;
abandonar; renunciar.
kaka loliye = unsteadiness; I 16 kak a laulye I 90

fickleness (lolabhva) ||
inestabilidad; inconstancia;
volubilidad.
kaki gatyatthe = going || ir. I 17 kak i gatyartha I 94
kakkha hasane = laughing || rer; I 21 kakh a hasane (Kaka, Majar) I 124

sonrer.
kakha hasane = laughing || rer; I 23 kakh a hasane I 124

sonrer. kakh e hasane I 821
13
14
kakhi kakhya = doubting || I 22 kk i kkym I 698

dudar.
kakhi icchya = wishing; desiring I 23 ......

|| desear.
kaca bandhane = binding || atadura; I 33 kac a bandhane I 181

ligazn; ligar; atar.
kaca dittiya = shining || brillar. VIII ......

293
kajja byathane = hurting (his) || I 43 karj a vyathane I 246

daar; lastimar; herir.
kaa vass-varaesu = raining and I 52 ka e varvaraayo I 315

covering; obstructing || llover
y cubrir; obstruir.
kaa gatiya = going || ir. I 53 ka gatau I 342
kaha kicchajvane = difficult or I 56 kah a kcchrajvane I 356

painful living || vida difcil o
dolorosa.
kahi soke = grieving; sorrowing || VIII kah i oke X 303

lamentar; sentir pesar. 298
kai chede = cutting || cortar. VIII ka i bhedane X 44

298
kaha kahane = pulling; I 59 ......

dragging || tirar; arrastrar;
jalar.
14
15
kaa sadde = making sound || I 59 ka a abdrtha I 476

producir sonido.
kaa nimlane = winking; blinking VIII ka a nimlane X 175

|| parpadear; cerrar los ojos. 302
kaa savane = hearing (see also VIII chidra karabhedane, X378

chidda) || or. 304 chidr a karaa-bhedane ity
kar a eke; kara iti
dhtvantaram ity
apare (PD). Bhede
dvau dht (K)
kati suttajanane = making a I 67 ......

thread; spinning || hacer un
hilo; hilar.
kati chedane = cutting || cortar. I 67 kt chedane VI 141
kati chedane = cutting || cortar. II kt chedane VI 141

214
kattara sethille = looseness; weakness VIII katra kattra aithilye, karta ity X366
|| flojedad; laxitud; debilidad. 310 (K.) apy eke
kattha silghya = praising || I 73 katth a lghym I 37

elogiar; alabar.
katha hisya = hurting || daar; I 73 ......

lastimar; herir.
katha nippke = cooking || cocinar; I 74 kvath e nipke I 899

cocer.
15
16
katha kathane = talking || hablar. VIII ......

310
katha vkyapabandhe = connecting VIII katha vkyaprabandhe X 307

sentences; composition || 311
conectar o relacionar
oraciones; composicin.
kathi koille = crookedness || I 73 grath i kauilye I 36

deshonestidad; cualidad de
torcido.
kada avhne rodane ca = calling I 95 ......

and crying || llamar, convocar
y llorar.
kadi avhne rodane ca = calling I 91 kad i hvne rodane ca I 70

and crying || llamar, convocar krad i hvne rodane ca I 71
y llorar.
kadi velambe = hanging down I 95 kad i vaiklavye I 809

(vilambabhva) || colgar. krad i vaiklavye I 810
klad i vaiklavye I 811
kadda kucchite sadde = making an I 86 kard a kutsite abde I 60

unpleasant sound || producir
un sonido desagradable.
16
17
kana ditti-kantsu = shining and I 112 kan dpti-knti-gatiu I 488

desire; wish || brillar y desear.
kanuy6 sadde = making sound || I 144 kny i abde unde ca I 514

producir sonido.
kanda stacce = continuity VIII -krand a statye X 188

(satatabhva) || continuidad. 313
kapa karuya = compassion || I 120 kp a kpy gatau ca I 808

compasin.
kapa avakampane = shaking || VIII kp a avakalkane X 208

vibrar; agitar. 327
kapi gatiya = going || ir. VIII cap i gatym X 77

326
kapu his-takkalagandhesu7 = I 120 ......

hurting and smell of resin ||
daar; lastimar; herir y olor de
resina.
kapu smatthiye = ability || I 120 kp smarthye I 799

habilidad; capacidad.
kappa vidhimhi = doing (kriy) || VIII ......

hacer; accin; acto. 323
6
kany (Smith).
7
Rpasiddhi page 419.
17
18
kappa vitakke vidhimhi chedane ca VIII ......

= thinking, doing and cutting 323
|| pensar; reflexionar; hacer y
cortar.
kabba gatiya = going || ir. I 123 karb a gatau I 447
kabba dabbe8 = egotism; arrogance I 124 karv a darpe I 613

(ahakra) || egosmo;
arrogancia (lit. hacer yo).
kamu padavikkhepe = walking I 131 kram u pdavikepe I 502

(padas gamana) || caminar
(lit. ir con el pie).
kamu icch-kantsu = wishing and VIII kam u kntau I 470

delighting || desear y deleitar. 331
kara karae = doing || hacer. VII u k karae VIII

266 10
kala sakhyne9 = calculating || I 166 kal a abda-sakhynayo I 526

contar; calcular.
kala khepe = throwing || arrojar, VIII kal a kepe X 64

tirar; lanzar; descartar. 342
kala gati-sakhynesu10 = going VIII kala gatau sakhyne ca X 319

and calculating || ir y contar; 343
calcular.
8
dappe (Smith).
9
sakhne (Smith).
10
gati-sakhnesu (Smith).
18
19
kaladi avhne rodane ca = calling I 91 klad i hvne rodane ca I 72

y llorar.
kalaha kucchane = reproaching; I 196 galh a kutsym I 668

contempt || reprochar, criticar;
desprecio, desdn.
kalidi paridevane = lamenting || I 91 klid i paridevane I 15

lamentar. I 73
kalla asadde = silence; noiseless I 166 kall a avyakte abde aabde I 527
(nissadda) || silencio; ausencia iti svm
de ruido (silencioso).
kava vae = color || color. I 170 kab vare I 405
kasa vilekhane = scratching; I 173 k a vilekhane I 1039

writing || rayar; escribir. VI 6
kasa hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 ka a hisrtha I 716

lastimar; herir.
kasa hisya = hurting || daar; I 184 cha a hisym I 939

lastimar; herir.
kas gati-sosanesu11 = going and I 187 kas i gati-sanayo ity II 14

making dry || ir y secar. kas a eke ity api
ka a
kassa gatiya = going || ir. I 183 kas a gatau I 913
11
ssanesu (Smith).
19
20
kaa made kakkasse ca = I 200 ka a made I 383

intoxicating and roughness; VI 86
harshness (kakkasiya, ka a krkaye I 372
pharusabhvo) || intoxicar
(locura) y dureza, aspereza.
kaa secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 201 ga a secane I 814

rociar, asperjar; verter.
ktha hisya = hurting || daar; VIII krath a hisym K.

lastimar; herir. 311 X 218
ksa saddakucchya = coughing I 181 ks abdakutsym I 654

|| toser.
ksu dittiya = shining I 181 k dptau I 678

(virjanat); manifestation
(pkaat) || brillar;
manifestacin (ser claro o
evidente).
ki hisya = hurting || daar; IV k hisym V7

kici maddane = crushing || VIII ......

aplastar; triturar. 291
kia gatiya = going || ir. I 53 ki a gatau I 314
kita nivse rogpanayane ca = I 65 kit a bandhane nivse ca I 1042

living and removing illness;
curing || residir, vivir y curar,
sanar.
20
21
kita e = knowing || conocer; I 67 ki kit a jne (K-III 20) III 20

comprender.
kitta sasandane12 = discussing || VIII kt a saabdane X 111

discutir, hablar. 308
kipa dubballe = weakness; VIII kpa daurbalye X 323

feebleness || debilidad. 327
kila13 bandhe = binding || ligar; atar. I 163 kl a bandhane I 557
kila ptiya-kanesu = joyfulness I 168 kil a vaityakranayo; VI 61

(ptassa bhvo) and playing; vaitye (K.)
sporting (k) || alegra;
regocijo y jugar.
kilisa bdhane = hindering; I 179 kle a avyaktym vci, I 638

afflicting || obstruir, bdhane iti Durga
obstaculizar; afectar, afligir.
kilisa upatpe = vexation; III kli a upatpe IV 52a

tormenting || molestar; 238
fastidiar; atormentar.
kilisa vibdhane = hindering; V kli vibdhane IX 50

obstructing || obstruir, 255
obstaculizar; afectar.
kilota addabhve = moistness; I 67 ......

wetness (tintabhva) ||
humedad.
12
sasaddane (Smith).
13
kla (Smith).
21
22
kivi hisya = hurting || daar; IV ......

k dabbavinimaye = exchange of V u kr dravyavinimaye IX 1

goods; trading (kayavikkaya- 247
vasena bhaassa
parivattana) || intercambio
de substancia (bienes);
comerciar.
ka bandhe = binding (bandhana) VIII k a vare X 99

|| ligar; atar. 297 (bandhavaro-Kalpa)
ka vihre = sporting || jugar; I 200 kr vihre I 373

recrear(se).
ku sadde = making sound || I 10, ku ku abde abde I 999

producir sonido. 209 II 33
ku kucchya = reproaching VI ......

(garah) || reprochar, criticar. 259
kuka dne = taking; seizing || I 16 kuk a dne I 91

kuca sadde tre = very high sound I 30 kuc a abde tre I 199
(accuccasadda) || sonido muy
fuerte.
22
23
kuca sapaccana-koilla- I 30 kuc a saparcana-kauiya- I 910

paikkama-vilekhanesu = pratiambha-
uniting; crookedness; going vilekhaneu
back and scratching; writing ||
unir; deshonestidad; regresar;
retroceder y rayar; escribir.
kuca sakocane = contracting; I 31 kuc a sakocane VI 75

distorting || contraer (reducir);
encoger; torcer; deformar.
kuccha avakkhepe = throwing down VIII kuts a avakepae X 158

(adhokhipana) || arrojar; tirar 294
abajo.
kuji abyattasadde = inarticulate I 44 kj a avyakte abde I 240

sound || sonido inarticulado.
kuji saddatthe = making sound || I 44 gj a abdrtha I 267

producir sonido. gj i abdrtha I 268
kuju theyyakarae = stealing || I 42 kuj u steyakarae I 214

robar; hurtar.
kujja adhomukhkarae = facing I 49 ......

down || mirar hacia abajo.
kuca koill-appbhvesu = I 30 kuc a kauilylpbhvayo I 200

crookedness and smallness; kruc a kauilylpbhvayo I 201
littleness || deshonestidad;
cualidad de torcido y
pequeez; poquedad.
23
24
kua koille = crookedness || I 54 ku a kauilye VI 73

torcido.
kua14 chedane = cutting || cortar. I 54 tru a chedane VI 82

159
kui15 dhe = burning || calor; VIII ka paritpe paridhe ity X 344

quemar; arder. 297 anye
kua chedane = cutting || cortar. VIII ku a chedana- X 23

296 bhartsanayo
kuhi lasiye gatipaighte ca = I 56 kuh i pratighte; I 365

laziness and obstructing the gatipratighte (K.)
going (action) || pereza;
flojedad; inactividad y
obstruir la accin de ir; cojear;
renquear.
kuhi soke = grieving; sorrowing || I 57 kah i oke I 283

lamentar; sentir pesar.
kui dhe = burning || calor; I 58 ku i dhe I 289

quemar; arder.
kui vedhane16 = piercing || VIII gu i veane X 46

perforar; atravesar; penetrar. 299
14
tua (Smith).
15
k (Smith).
16
vehane (Smith).
24
25
kua saddopakarae = component I 61 ku a abdopakaraayo VI 45

of a sound; making sound ||
componente (parte) de un
sonido; producir sonido.
kua sakocane = contracting; VIII kua sakocane, pi X 348

shrinking || contraer (reducir); 302
kua mantane = calling; VIII kua mantrae X 347

addressing || llamar, convocar; 304
dirigirse; hablar a alguien.
kutha hisya = hurting || daar; I 73 krath a hisrtha I 838

lastimar; herir. klath a hisrtha I 839
kuthi his-sakilesesu = hurting I 71 kuth i his- I 44

and defiling || daar; lastimar; sakleanayo
herir y ensuciar; manchar;
contaminar.
kuda kya = playing; sporting || I 93 kurd a krym eva; guda- I 21

jugar. krym eva (K.)
kudi anatabhsane = lying; VIII kudr i antabhae X6

speaking falsehood || mentir. 312
kudha kope = to be angry || enojo, III krudh a krodhe; kope (K.) IV 80

odio, ira. 231
kupa kope = to be angry || enojo, III kup a krodhe IV 122

odio, ira. 235
25
26
kupa bhsya = speaking || VIII kup a bhrtha X 239

hablar. 327
kubi acchdane = clothing; I 123 kub i cchdane; I 453

covering || cubrir; arropar, chdane (K.)
vestir.
kubi acchdane = clothing; VIII kub i cchdane; X 113

covering || cubrir; arropar, 328 chdane (K.)
vestir.
kubbi17 uggame = rising; going up || I 124 gurv udyamane I 605

kumra kya = playing; sporting || VIII kumra krym X 331

jugar. 335
kura sadde akkose ca = making I 156 kur a abde VI 51

sound and insulting; abusing ||
producir sonido e insultar;
agraviar.
kula sakhne bandhumhi ca = I 168 kul a sastyne bandhuu I 895

calculating and relative; ca
relation || contar; calcular y
pariente, familiar; relacin.
kusa avhne rodane ca = calling I 183 kru a hvne rodane ca I 909

y llorar.
17
kubb (Smith).
26
27
kusi bhsya = speaking || VIII kus i bhrtha X 223

hablar. 347
kusu haraa-dittsu = carrying and III knas u hvaraa-dptyo IV 6

shining || llevar; transportar y 238
brillar.
kuha vimhpane = making others VIII kuha vismpane X 353

astonished; pretending || 350
asombrar; sorprender;
aparentar; fingir; engaar.
kua18 ghasane = eating || comer. I 201 k a ghanatve VI 88
ka appasde = displeasing; VIII k a aprasde; X 162

disliking || disgustar; 297 apradne (K.)
desagradar.
kla varae = obstructing; I 163 kl a varae I 558

covering || obstruir; cubrir.
ke sadde = making sound || I 10, kai abde I 964

keta mantane = calling; VIII keta rvae nimantrae X 363

addressing || llamar, convocar; 309 ca (not in K.)
18
ka (Smith).
27
28
kele mamyane = taking It is I 166 ......

mine by attachment or wrong
view || hacer mo (tomar esto
es mo) con apego o
concepcin errnea.
kelu gatiya = going || ir. I 165 kel calane I 570
kevu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 171 klev sevane I 504

rociar, asperjar; verter. (DP)
khaja manthe = stirring (viloana) || I 43 khaj a manthe I 250

revolver; menear; batir.
khaji gativekalle = deficiency in I 43 khaj i gativaikalye I 252

going (limping) || dificultad
en caminar; cojear; renquear.
khaji dne gatiya ca = giving and I 45 kaj i gati-dnayo I 806

going || dar e ir.
khaji kicchajvane = difficult or VIII kaj i kcchrajvane X 79

painful living || vida difcil o 294 chaj i kcchrajvane X 73
dolorosa. (K)
X 88
(DP)
khaji rakkhae = protecting || VIII ......

proteger; cuidar. 294
khajja byathane majjane ca = hurting I 43 kharj a vyathane pjane ca I 247

and purity (suddhi) || daar; mrjane ca I 142
lastimar; herir y pureza. (K)
28
29
khaa kase = digging (Ns.) || I 53 kha a kkym or I 331

cavar; excavar. kkym
khaa savarae = restraining; VIII kha a savarae X 89

protecting || controlar; 297 gha a savarae X 99
restringir; contener; proteger. (PD)
khai manthe19 = stirring; churning I 59 kha i manthe I 303

|| revolver; menear; batir.
khai chede = cutting || cortar. VIII kha i bhedane X 44

298
khada theriye dhiti-hissu ca = I 84 khad a sthairye hisy I 51

firmness; energy and hurting || ca
firmeza; constancia; energa y
daar; herir; lastimar.
khadi20 parighte = killing; injuring I 105 khid a parighte VI 142

all around (samantato
hanana) || matar; daar o
lastimar todo alrededor.
khadda dasane = stinging; biting I 86 khard a dandake (daane-C.) I 61

(dantasukatakattik kriy) ||
morder; picar.
khanu avadrae = breaking; digging I 113 khan u avadrae I 927

|| romper; quebrar; cavar;
excavar.
19
khae (S; Smith).
20
khdi (Smith).
29
30
khanda gati-sosanesu = going and I 91 skand ir gati-oaayo I 1028

making dry || ir y secar.
khapi khantiya = patience || VIII kap i kntym X 78

paciencia. 326
khabba gatiya = going || ir. I 123 kharb a gatau I 448
khabba dabbe21 = egotism; arrogance I 124 kharv a darpe I 614

(ahakra) || egosmo;
khabhi paibaddhe22 = depending; I 127 skabh i pratibandhe I 414

tied or bound to || depender;
ligar.
khamya vidhnane = trembling; I 144 kmy vidhnane I 515

shaking || temblar; sacudir.
khamu sahane = enduring || soportar; I 133 kam s sahane I 469

aguantar; tolerar. kam V 97
khara khaye = exhaustion; I 153 kar a sacalane? I 904

destruction || agotar, acabar;
destruccin.
khala calane = trembling; agitating || I 165 skhal a sacalane I 577

temblar; sacudir; vibrar.
khala sacinane = accumulating || I 165 khal a sacaye I 578

acumular.
21
dappe (Smith).
22
paibandhe (Smith).
30
31
khala soceyye = purity (sucibhva) || VIII kal a aucakarmai X 57

pureza; purificacin. 341
khaa bhede = breaking; dividing || VIII kha a khaane X 44

romper; dividir. 350 bhedane X 47
(DP)
kh pakathane = telling; I 17 ......

announcing; preaching
(cikkhana, desana) || decir;
anunciar; predicar.
khda bhakkhane = eating || comer. I 83 khd bhakae I 50
khi23 khaye = exhaustion; I 18 ki kaye I 225

destruccin.
khi nivse = living || residir, vivir. I 18 ki nivsagatyo VI 114
khi khaye = exhaustion; III ki kaye I 255

destruction || agotar, acabar; 222
destruccin.
khi nivse kodha-hissu ca = III ki nivsa-gatyo VI 114

living; to be angry and hurting 222
|| residir, vivir; enojo, odio, ira
y daar, herir.
khi24 gatiya = going || ir. V ......

247
23
kh (Smith).
24
kh (Smith).
31
32
khija25 abyattasadde = inarticulate I 44 kj a avyakte abde I 256

khia uttsane = to fear || tener I 52 khi a trse (utrse-K) I 324

miedo; temer.
khiu hisya = hurting || daar; VII ki u hisym VIII 4

khidi avayave26 = limb; part; I 89 bid i avayave C. 1-

constituent || miembro; parte; 22
componente.
khidi dniye = wretchedness; III khid a dainye IV 61

poverty (dnabhva) || 227
pobreza; miseria.
khipa perae = grinding; crushing I 121 kip a prerae VI 5

(cuikaraa, pisana) ||
aplastar; moler; triturar.
khipa abyattasadde = inarticulate I 121 ......

khipa chaane = throwing away; I 121 ......

rejecting || arrojar; tirar;
descartar.
khipa perae = grinding; crushing || III kip a prerae IV 14

25
khja (Smith).
26
avayave ti (Candaviduno)
32
33
khipa khepe = throwing || arrojar, IV ......

khipi gatiya = going || ir. I 121 ......
khivu nidassane = pointing out; I 170 kiv u nirasane I 599

indicating || sealar; indicar; kev u nirasane I 569
explicar. (DP)
khivu27 made = intoxicating || I 170 kb made I 407

intoxicar.
khivu nidassane28 = pointing out; III kiv u nirasane I 599

indicating || sealar; indicar; 238
explicar.
kh khaye = exhaustion; IV ......

destruccin.
khu sadde = making sound || I 19, u ku abde II 27

khuju theyyakarae = stealing || I 42 khuj u steyakarae I 215

robar; hurtar.
khuu hisya = hurting || daar; VII ka u hisym VIII 3

khuda kya = playing; sporting || I 93 khurd a krym eva I 24

jugar. (DP)
27
khvu (Smith).
28
nirasane (Smith).
33
34
khudi pavane = jumping || saltar. I 91 skud i pravae I9
khubha sacalane = agitating || agitar; I 129 kubh a sacalane I 787

sacudir; vibrar. IV 129
IX 47
khubha sacalane = agitating || III kubh a sacalane IV 129

temblar; sacudir; vibrar. 236
khura chedane vilekhane ca = I 156 khur a chedane VI 52

cutting and scratching; kur a vilekhane VI 54
writing || cortar y rayar;
escribir.
khusi akkosane = abusing; insulting VIII ......

|| insultar; agraviar. 347
khua ghasane blye ca = eating and I 201 ku a blye VI 89

childhood || comer y niez;
infancia.
khe khdana-sattsu = eating and I 19 khai khadane I 960

existing || comer y existir; ser.
khe khaye = exhaustion; I 209 kai kaye I 961

destruccin.
khea bhakkhae = eating || comer. VIII khea bhakae X 328

297
khepa perae = grinding; crushing VIII kapa prerae X 392

(cuikaraa) || aplastar; 327
moler; triturar.
34
35
khelu gatiya = going || ir. I 165 khel calane I 571

kvel calane I 572
khevu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 171 khev secane I 537

rociar, asperjar; verter.
khoa khepe = throwing || arrojar, VIII koa kepe X 329

khoda paighte = striking || golpear; I 91 khor gatipratighte I 584

pegar; chocar.
khola gatipaighte = limping || I 165 khol gatipratighte I 584

cojear; renquear.
khy pakathane = telling; I 17 khy prakathane II 51

announcing; preaching ||
decir; anunciar; predicar.
gaja saddatthe = making sound || I 44 gaj a abdrtha I 265

producir sonido. gaj i abdrtha I 266
gaja maddana-saddesu = crushing VIII gaj a abdrthau X 106

and making sound || aplastar; 295 mrj a abdrthau X 107
triturar y producir sonido.
gajja saddatthe = making sound || I 44 garj a abde I 244

producir sonido.
gai vadanekadese = a part of the I 58 ga i vadanaikadee I 65a

mouth; action of the mouth || I 384
parte de la boca; accin de la
boca.
35
36
gai made = intoxicating || I 59 ka i made I 383

intoxicar.
gaa gatiya = going || ir. I 61 ka a gatau I 831
gaa sakhyne29 = calculating || VIII gaa sakhyne X 309

contar; calcular. 303
gaecu30 theyyakarae = stealing I 30 gluc u steyakarae I 213

(thenana, corik) || robar;
hurtar.
gada viyattiya vcya = I 84 gad a vyakty vci I 53

articulate speech || lenguaje
articulado.
gada devasadde = thundering VIII gad devaabde X 314

(meghasadda) || tronar; sonido 313
de tormenta.
gadda sadde = making sound || I 86 gard a abde I 58

producir sonido.
gaddha abhikakhya = longing; VIII gardh a abhikkym X 125

desiring; wishing || desear; 319 (Kecit)
anhelar.
gantha santhambhe = supporting || VIII granth a sadarbhe X 294

apoyar; sostener; soportar. 311
29
sakhne (Smith).
30
galocu (Smith).
36
37
gandha scane addane = showing VIII gandh a ardane X 145

(paksana) and floating 319
(pariplut) || mostar; indicar y
flotar.
gabba gatiya = going || ir. I 123 garb a gatau I 449
gabba dabbe31 = egotism; arrogance I 124 garv a darpe I 614

(ahakra) || egosmo;
gabba mne = selfishness, pride VIII garva mne X 359

(ahakra) || egosmo; 328
gabbha dhrae = holding; bearing || I 127 galbh a dhrye I 419

sostener; soportar; mantener.
gamu gatiya = going || ir. I 134, gam gatau I 1031

202
gara secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 150 g secane I 984

gara uggame = rising; going up || I 156 gur udyamane? VI 103

gara uggame = raising; going up || VIII gr a udyamane X 155

surgir; salir; aparecer. 335
garaha kucchane = reproaching || I 196 garh a kutsym I 667

reprochar, criticar; desprecio,
desdn.
31
dappe (Smith).
37
38
garaha vinindane = reproaching || VIII garh a vinindane X 301

reprochar, criticar; censurar. 350
gala adane = eating || comer. I 165 gal a adane I 579
gavesa maggane = searching; seeking VIII gavea mrgae X 337

|| buscar; rastrear. 347
gasu adane = eating || comer. I 183 gras u adane I 661
gaha gahae = taking || tomar. I 197 gh grahae I 681

glah a grahae I 652
(DP)
gaha updne = firmly taking VI grah a updne IX 61

(gahaa) || tomar firmemente. 257
g gatiya = going || ir. I 28, g gatau I 998

209
gdha patih-nissaya-gandhesu32 = I 108 gdh pratih-lipsayor I4

footing; supporting and smell granthe ca
|| base (lugar donde pararse);
apoyar; sostener y olor.
ghu viloane = stirring; churning || I 197 gh viloane I 680

revolver; menear; batir.
gidhu abhikakhya = longing; III gdh u abhikkym IV 136

desiring; wishing || desear; 232
anhelar.
32
ganthesu (Smith).
38
39
gira niggirae = trickling; oozing; I 155 g nigirae VI 117

dripping (paggharaa) ||
gotear; chorrear; escurrir;
exudar.
gila ajjhoharae = swallowing || I 165 ......

tragar; ingerir.
gile ptikkhaye = loss of joy || I 166 glai harakaye I 952

prdida de la alegra.
gilevu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 171 glev secane I 532

gilesu anvicchya = wishing again I 181 ge anvicchym I 645

and again (punappuna gle ity eke
icch) || desear, anhelar una y
otra vez.
gu karsussagge = voiding of I 26 gu purotsarge VI 106

excrement (vaccakaraa) ||
evacuar excremento.
gu sadde = making sound || I 28, gu avyakte abde I 997

gu uggame = rising; going up; I 28 gur udyamane? VI 103

manifesting (pkaat) ||
surgir; salir; aparecer;
manifestar.
gucu theyyakarae = stealing I 30 gruc u steyakarae I 212

(thenana, corik) || robar;
hurtar.
39
40
guji abyattasadde = inarticulate I 44 guj i avyakte abde I 218

gua mantane = calling; VIII gua mantrae X 347

addressing || llamar, convocar; 304
guda kya = playing; sporting || I 93 gurd a krym eva I 23

jugar. (DP)
gudha parivehane = wrapping; III gudh a pariveane IV 13

covering || envolver; cubrir. 232
gupa rakkhae = protecting || I 120 gup rakae I 422

proteger; cuidar.
gupa gopana-jigucchanesu = I 120 gup a gopane I 1019

protecting and disgusting;
disliking || proteger; cuidar y
disgustar.
gupa bhsya = speaking || VIII gup a bhrtha X 231

hablar. 327
gupha ganthe = tying; making a knot I 122 guph a grahae VI 31

(ganthikaraa) || atar; amarrar; gumph a grahae VI 38
hacer un nudo. (DP)
guh savarae = restraining; I 197 guh savarae I 944

protecting || controlar;
restringir; contener; proteger.
gua rakkhya = protecting || I 201 gu a rakym VI 77

proteger; cuidar.
40
41
ge sadde = making sound || I 26, gai abde I 965

ge sadde = making sound || IV g abde IX 28

gevu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 171 gev secane I 531

gottha vase = lineage || linaje. I 74 ......
goma upalepane = coating; VIII goma upalepane X 330

smearing || manchar; untar; 334
cubrir.
ghaa saghte = accumulating; I 53 jha a saghte I 328

collecting || acumular; juntar;
agregar.
ghaa cetya = urging || incitar, I 54 gha a ceym I 800

instigar.
ghaa saghte = accumulating; VIII gha a saghte X 183

agregar.
ghaa saghe hantyatthe ca33 = VIII gha a saghte X 183

accumulating; collecting and 297
striking; killing || acumular;
juntar; agregar y golpear,
pegar; matar.
33
In Pinya-Dhtupha hantyarth ca is a Gaa Stra meaning the roots denoting killing take ic without
change of sense. See Vasu ii 474. En el Pinya-Dhtupha hantyarth ca es una Gaa Stra que signifca que
las races con el significado de matar toman ic sin cambiar el significado. Vase Vasu ii 474.
41
42
ghaa bhsya = speaking || VIII gha a bhrtha X 226

hablar. 297
ghai bhsya = speaking || VIII gha i bhrtha X 227

hablar. 297
ghaa34 ghaane35 = striving (vyma- VIII ......

karaa) || esforzar(se). 296
ghaa calane = trembling || temblar; VIII gha a calane X 87

sacudir; vibrar. 296
ghai gahae = taking || tomar. I 61 gh i grahae I 463
ghara secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 150 gh secane I 985

ghasu36 saharise = knocking against; I 174 gh u saghare I 740

colliding (saghaana) ||
golpear contra; chocar.
gh gandhopdne = smelling || I 28 ghr gandhopdne I 973

oler.
gh gandhopdne = smelling || III ghr gandhopdne I 973

oler. 222
ghii gahae = taking || tomar. I 61 ghi i grahae I 461
ghiu dittiya = shining || brillar. VII gh u dptau VIII 7

263
34
ghaa (Smith).
35
ghaane (Smith).
36
ghusu (Smith).
42
43
ghu abhigamane = attaining; I 29 dyu abhigamane II 31

obtaining; understanding
(adhigamana) || alcanzar;
conseguir; obtener; entender;
comprender.
ghu sadde = making sound || I 29, ghu abde I 1000

ghua parivattane = turning or I 54 ghu a parivartane I 782

rolling round || dar vueltas;
voltear; girar; rodar; rotar.
ghua paighte = striking || golpear; I 54 ghu a pratighte VI 91

pegar; chocar.
ghua gamane = going || ir. I 61 ghu a bhramae I 464

VI 48
ghui gahae = taking || tomar. I 61 ghu i grahae I 462
ghua gamane = going || ir. I 61 ghr a bhramae I 464

VI 49
ghura abhimatta37-saddesu = intense I 156 ghur a bhmrtha-abdayo VI 55

intoxication and making
sound || intoxicacin intensa y
producir sonido.
ghusa sadde = making sound || I 172 ghu ir aviabdane (abde-C.) I 683

producir sonido.
37
bhmattha (Smith).
43
44
ghusa sadde = making sound || VIII ......

ghusi visaddane = shouting VIII ghu ir viabdane X 187

(ugghosana) || gritar; vocear. 346
ghus kantikarae = making what is I 183 ghu i kntikarae I 682

pleasing || agradar; hacer
aquello que agrada.
ghora gatipaighte = limping I 146 khol gati-pratighte I 584

(gatipaihanana) || cojear; khor gati-pratighte I 584
renquear.
caka titti-paightesu = satisfying I 12 cak a tiptaupratighte ca I 93

(tappana) and striking || tiptau I 820
satisfacer; saciar y golpear;
pegar; chocar.
cakka byathane = hurting; VIII cakk a vyathane X 56

oppressing || daar; lastimar; 282
herir; oprimir.
cakkha viyattiya vcya = I 26 cak i vyakty vci II 7

articulado.
cacca paribhsana-vajjanesu = I 30 carc a paribhaa-his-tarjaeu I 749

abusing; blaming; censuring jarj a paribhaa-his-tarjaeu I 748
and avoiding || denostar; jharjh a paribhaa-his-tarjaeu I 750
reprochar; criticar; censurar y carc a paribhaa-bhartsanayo VI 17
evitar; abstenerse de. jarj a paribhaa-bhartsanayo VI 17
jharjh a paribhaa-bhartsanayo I 17
44
45
cacca ajjhayane = reciting; learning VIII carc a adhyayane X 172

|| recitar; aprender; estudiar. 292
caja cge = giving up; abandoning I 44 tyaj a hnau I 1035

|| dejar; abandonar; renunciar.
cacu gatiya = going || ir. I 30 cac u gatyartha I 205
caa paribhsane = abusing; I 54 va a paribhae I 816

blaming; censuring ||
denostar; reprochar; criticar;
censurar.
cai kope = to be angry || enojo, I 58 ca i kope I 298

odio, ira.
caa dne = giving || dar. I 61 ca a gatau dne ca I 833
cat his-gandhesu = hurting and I 67 ct his-granthanayo VI 35

smelling || daar; lastimar;
herir y oler.
cada ycane = requesting I 97 cad e ycane I 918

(ajjhesana) || solicitar; pedir. cat e ycane I 918
cadi samiddhiya hildane I 90 cad i hlde dptau ca I 68

dittiya ca = success,
prosperity; flirting and
splendor, beauty; shining ||
xito; prosperidad; flirtear;
coquetear y brillar; esplendor;
belleza.
45
46
capa kakkane = making powder; VIII cah a parikalkane X 83

pulverizing || pulverizar; 326 cap a ity eke
moler.
cabba gatiya = going || ir. I 123 carb a gatau I 452
camu adane = eating || comer. I 131 cam u adane I 497
camba adane = eating || comer. I 124 carv a adane I 610
caya gatiya = going || ir. I 139 cay a gatau I 507
cara carae = walking; going || I 146 ......

caminar; ir.
cara gati-bhakkhaesu = going and I 147 car a gatyartha bhakae I 591

eating || ir y comer. pi I 560
(DP)
cara asasaye = not doubting || no VIII car a saaye (asaaye- X 205

dudar. 335 Durga)
cala kampane = trembling || I 167, cal a kampane I 885

temblar; vibrar. 210
casa bhakkhae = eating || comer. I 184 ca a bhakae I 938
caha parisakkane = endeavoring; I 195 cah a parikalkane = I 765

trying || esforzar(se); cheating; deceiving X 83
empear(se); intentar. X 320
caha parikatthane = boasting || VIII caha parikalkane X 320

ostentar. 349
46
47
cyu pj-nismanesu = I 144 cy pj-nimanayo I 929

venerating, honoring (pjan)
and looking; hearing
(olokana, savana) || venerar;
honrar y mirar; oir.
ci caye = piling || apilar, IV ci cayane V5

amontonar; acumular. 245
ci caye = piling || apilar, V ci cayane V5

amontonar; acumular. 247
cika38 masane = touching; rubbing VIII ck a marae X 284

|| tocar; frotar. 283
cikkha viyattiya vcya = I 26 ......

articulado.
cigula paribbhamane = turning round VIII ......

and round; rotating || dar 344
vueltas; voltear; girar; rodar.
cia pesane = sending || enviar; I 53 ci a parapraiye I 337

mandar. parapreye I 316
(DP)
cita sacetane = urging || incitar, VIII cit a sacetane X 135

instigar. 307
38
cka (Smith).
47
48
cit sae = making a mark I 63 cit sajne I 39

(cihana, lakkhaakaraa) ||
marca, seal; marcar.
citta cittakarae, kadci dassane pi VIII citra citrkarae, kadcid X 370

= making variegated 310 darane39
(vicittabhvakaraa) and
seeing that is rare or unusual ||
abigarrar y ver lo que es raro
o inusual.
cine maanya = imagining; I 117 ......

regarding || considerar;
imaginar.
cinta cintya = thinking || pensar; VIII cit i smtym X2

reflexionar. 305
ciri hisya = hurting || daar; IV ciri hisym V 31

cila vasane = to clothe || arropar, I 169 cil a vasane VI 63

vestir.
cilla sehille = looseness; weakness I 165 cill a aithilye bhva- I 566

(sihilabhva) || flojedad; karae ca (aithilye-
laxitud; relajacin; debilidad. K)
civa40 bhsya = speaking || VIII cv a bhrtha X 234

hablar. 345
39
K. 320.
40
cva (Smith).
48
49
civu41 dna-savaresu = taking; I 171 cv dna-savaraayo I 928

seizing and restraining ||
tomar; asir, agarrar y
controlar; restringir; contener.
cu cavane = falling; dying || caer; I 33 cyu gatau I 1004

cesar; morir.
cu gatiya = going || ir. I 209 cyu gatau I 1004
cu cavane42 = falling; dying || VIII cyu sahane, hasane ity X 206

caer; cesar; morir. 292 eke
cukka byathane = hurting; VIII cukk a vyathane X 56

oppressing || daar; lastimar; 282
herir; oprimir.
cua appbhve = smallness; I 54 cu i alpbhve I 347

littleness || pequeez;
poquedad.
cua chedane = cutting || cortar. I 54 cu a chedane VI 84
cua chedane = cutting || cortar. VIII cu a chedane X 72

296
cua43 vibhede = dividing || dividir. VIII ca a bhedane X 181

297
cui chedane = cutting || cortar. VIII cu i chedane X 117

297
41
cvu (Smith).
42
cvane (Smith).
43
caa (Smith).
49
50
cua appabhve = smallness; VIII cu a alpbhve X 25

littleness || pequeez; 296
poquedad.
cua hvakarae = flirting; I 58 cu a bhvakarae I 370

dalliance || flirtear; coquetear.
cua chedane = cutting || cortar. I 62 cu a chidi (Kalpadruma)
cua44 sakocane = contracting; VIII cr a sakocane X 100

shrinking || contraer (reducir); 302
cua perae = grinding; crushing || VIII cr a prerae X 18

cuta secane kharae ca = I 64 cyut ir secane I 40

sprinkling and flowing || scyut ir karae I 41
rociar, asperjar y fluir, correr.
cuda sacodane attiya ca = VIII cud a sacodane X 53

accusing and ordering; 312
commanding || acusar y
ordenar, mandar.
cupa mandagatiya = going slowly I 120 cup a mandy gatau I 430

|| ir lentamente.
cubi vadanasayoge = kissing || I 123 cub i vaktrasayoge I 456

besar (lit. unin de caras).
cura theyye = stealing || robar; VIII cur a steye X1

hurtar. 278
44
ca (Smith).
50
51
culla hvakarae = flirting; I 164 cull a bhvakarae I 564

dalliance (vilsakaraa) ||
flirtear; coquetear.
cusa45 pne = drinking || beber. I 173 c a pne I 704
cea ceya = urging || incitar, I 54 ce a ceym I 275

instigar.
celu gatiya = going || ir. I 165 cel calane I 569
cevi cetantulye = urging; being I 171 vev vetin tulye = in the II 68

equal || incitar, instigar; ser same meaning as the
igual. root v
chaa chaane = discarding || VIII ......

descartar; desechar. 297
chaa chaane = throwing away; VIII ......

rejecting || arrojar; tirar; 299
descartar.
chada savarae = restraining; VIII chad i savarae X 41

protecting || controlar; 312
chada apavrae = covering; VIII chad a apavrae X 290

concealing || cubrir; ocultar; 314
esconder.
chadi ujjhane = leaving; abandoning I 95 chad ir rjane I 851

|| dejar; abandonar.
45
csa (Smith). In Kaktsna c a, t a, p a, m a, a, are shown with short u. Footnote to K 94. En
Kaktsna c a, t a, p a, m a, a, se muestran con una u corta. Nota al K 94.
51
52
chad icchya = wishing; desiring VIII ......

|| desear. 315
chadda vamane = vomiting || vomitar; VIII chard a vamane X 51

expeler. 312
chama gatimhi = going || ir. I 132 tsar a chadmagatau? I 586
chamu adane = eating || comer. I 131 cham u adane I 498
chida46 dvedhkarae = making into VIII cheda dvaidhkarae X 388

two; cutting; dividing || hacer 314
dos partes; cortar; dividir;
separar.
chidi dvedhkarae = making into II chid ir dvaidhkarae VII 3

two; cutting; dividing || hacer 215
dos partes; cortar; dividir;
separar.
chidi chijjane = cutting itself || III ......

cortarse. 226
chidda kaabhede = piercing the VIII chidra karabhede X 378

ears || perforar las orejas (para 314
colocar aretes).
chu chedane = cutting || cortar. I 39 see che in Sad.

divdigaa
chua chedane = cutting || cortar. I 54 chu a chedane VI 84
46
cheda (Smith).
52
53
chua chedane = cutting || cortar. VIII ......

296
che47 chedane = cutting || cortar. III cho chedane IV 38

224
jakkha bhakkhae hasane ca = eating I 23 jak a bhaka-hasanayo II 62

and laughing || comer y rer;
sonrer.
jaggha hasane = laughing || rer; I 29 ghagh a hasane? I 170

sonrer.
jacca paribhsana-vajjanesu = I 30 carc a paribhaa-his-tarjaeu I 749

abusing; blaming; censuring jarj a paribhaa-his-tarjaeu I 748
and avoiding || denostar; jharjh a paribhaa-his-tarjaeu I 750
reprochar; criticar; censurar y carc a paribhaa-bhartsanayo VI 17
evitar; abstenerse de. jarj a paribhaa-bhartsanayo VI 17
jharjh a paribhaa-bhartsanayo VI 17
jaja yuddhe = fighting (yujjhana) || I 44 jaj a yuddhe I 261

luchar, pelear.
jaji yuddhe = fighting (yujjhana) || I 44 jaj i yuddhe I 262

luchar, pelear.
jajjha paribhsana-tajjanesu = I 50 jarj a paribhaa-his-tarjaneu I 748

abusing; blaming; censuring carc a paribhaa-his-tarjaneu I 749
and threatening, menacing || jharjh a paribhaa-his-tarjaneu I 750
censurar y amenazar.
47
cho (Smith).
53
54
jaa saghte = accumulating; I 53 ja a saghte I 327

agregar.
jana sadde = making sound || I 113 ......

producir sonido.
jana janane = making; producing || III jan a janane III 24

hacer; producir; generar. 233
jan ptubhve = manifesting || III jan i prdurbhve IV 41

manifestar(se); aparecer. 233
jabha gattavinme = bending the I 127 jabh i gtravinme I 415

body or the limbs || doblar el
cuerpo o los miembros.
jabhi gattavinme = bending the I 127 jbh i gtravinme I 416

body or the limbs || doblar el
jabhi nsane = destroying || VIII jabh i nane X 176

destruir; hacer perecer. 330
jamu adane = eating || comer. I 131 jam u adane I 499
jara roge = aging (jararoga) || I 150 jvar a roge I 813

envejecer.
jara vayohnimhi = aging || VIII j jri vayohnau X 272

envejecer. 336 X 283
(DP)
jala dittiya = shining || brillar. I 166 jval a dptau I 842 I

884
54
55
jala dhae = prosperity || I 167 jal a ghtane (dhnye-C.) I 886

prosperidad.
jala apavrae = covering; VIII jal a apavrae X 10

concealing || cubrir; ocultar; 341
esconder.
jasa hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 ja a hisrtha I 719

lastimar; herir.
jasa hisya = hurting || daar; VIII jas u hisym X 130

jasa tane = beating; striking || VIII jas u tane X 178

golpear; pegar. 346
jasi rakkhae = protecting || VIII jas i rakae X 128

jgara niddakkhaye = awakening || I 154 jg nidrkaye II 63

despertar (lit. destruccin del
sueo).
jgara niddakkhaye = awakening || VII jg nidrkaye II 63

despertar (lit. destruccin del 277
sueo).
55
56
ji jaye = conquering; winning || I 42 ji jaye I 59

conquistar; triunfar; ganar.
ji abhibhavane48 = I 42 ji jri abhibhave I 993

overpowering || conquistar; I 994
subyugar; prevalecer; vencer;
superar.
ji jaye = conquering; winning || V ......

conquistar; triunfar; ganar. 248
ji49 jniya = loss; deprivation || V ......

prdida; privacin; carencia. 248
jimu50 adane = eating || comer. I 131 ...... (jamati idupadho

yam ity eke-K)
jiri hisya = hurting || daar; IV jiri hisym V 32

jisu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 174 ji u secane I 728

jra brhane = developing; I 146 ......

increasing (vahana) ||
aumentar; crecer; incrementar.
jva padhrae = keeping the I 170 jv a pradhrae I 594

life || mantener la vida.
48
abhibhave (Smith).
49
j (Smith).
50
jamu (Smith).
56
57
ju gatiya = going fast I 42, jyu gatau I 1005

(sghagati) || ir rpidamente. 209
jugi vajjane = avoiding || evitar; I 28 jug i varjane I 168

abstenerse de.
juta bhsane = saying; speaking I 66 jut bhsane I 32

(udraa) || hablar; decir;
pronunciar.
juta dittiya = shining || brillar. I 66, dyut a dptau I 777

210
juta dittiya = shining || brillar. VI ......

259
jusa51 hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 ru a hisrtha I 716

lastimar; herir.
jusa paritakkane = reflecting; VIII ju a paritarkae X 291

considering || pensar; 348
reflexionar; considerar.
jusi52 pti-sevanesu = joy and I 190 ju prti-sevanayo VI 8

associating || alegra; regocijo
y asociar(se).
jusi pti-sevanesu = joy and VI ......

associating; serving || alegra; 258
regocijo y asociar(se).
jua gatiya = going || ir. I 201 ju a gatau VI 37
51
jsa (Smith).
52
jus (Smith).
57
58
jua bandhane = binding || ligar; I 201 ju a bandhane VI 85

atar.
jua perae = grinding; crushing || VIII ju a prerae X 105

je khaye = exhaustion; I 42, jai kaye I 962

destruccin.
jesu gatiya = going || ir. I 181 ce gatau I 617

je gatau (DP) I
647
jehu payatane = striving || I 196 jeh prayatne I 675

esforzar(se).
[jha]53 ...... VIII j niyoge (-jane) j- K

296 payati bhtyn
jhapa dhe = burning || calor; VIII ......

quemar; arder. 323
jhamu adane = eating || comer. I 131 jham u adane I 501
jhasa hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 jha a hisrtha I 720

lastimar; herir.
53
Roots ending in jha and a are not generally met with (in curdi group). But in the grammatical treatises
(Sanskrit) they read niyojane. However, this example is not in accordance with the Buddhas word. Therefore,
it is not shown. Saddanti, page 296. Las races terminadas en jha y a generalmente no se encuentran (en el
grupo curdi). Pero en los tratados gramaticales (snscrito) se lee niyojane. Sin embargo, este ejemplo no est
de acuerdo con la Palabra de Buddha. Por lo tanto, no se muestra. Saddanti, pgina 296.
58
59
jhe cintya = thinking; I 49 dhyai cintym I 957

reflecting || pensar;
reflexionar.
jhe dittiya = shining || brillar. I 50 ......
apa tosana-nisnesu = giving VIII jap a jna-jpana- X 81

pleasure and sharpening || 322 mraa-toaa-
complacer; satisfacer; agradar nina-nimaneu
y afilar; aguzar.
amu adane = eating || comer. I 131 ......
avabodhane = knowing; I 50 ......

understanding || conocer;
comprender.
mraa-tosana-nisnesu = I 51 j mraa-toaa- I 849

killing; pleasure; joy and nimaneu (-
sharpening || matar; nineu, K)
complacer; satisfacer; agradar
y afilar; aguzar.
avabodhane = knowing; V j avabodhane IX 36

understanding || conocer; 249
comprender.
ala velambe = hanging down || I 167 al a vaiklavye I 887

colgar.
ika54 gatyatthe = going || ir. I 17 ik gatyartha I 103
54
ka (Smith).
59
60
ula velambe = hanging down || I 167 val a vaiklavye I 888

colgar.
eka gatyatthe = going || ir. I 208 tik a gatyartha I 103
h gatinivattiya = stopping I 55 h gatinivttau I 975

from going; standing || detener
el movimiento; pararse.
h gatinivattiya = stopping III ......

from going; standing 225
(uppajjamnassa gamanass
upacchedo) || detener el
movimiento; pararse.
he sadda-sakhtesu = making I 55 yai abda-saghtayo I 959

sound and telling || producir
sonido y decir; anunciar.
he vehane = wrapping; I 55 ai veane I 970

enveloping || envolver; cubrir.
apa saghte = accumulating; VIII ap a saghte X 138

agregar.
i55 vihyasagatiya I 57 vihyas gatau I 1017

gamanamatte ca = flying and
mere going || ir por el aire
(volar) y mero ir.
55
(Smith).
60
61
i56 khipan-uanesu = throwing I 57 ......

and flying up || arrojar, tirar;
lanzar; descartar y volar;
despegar.
i57 gatiya = going || ir. III vihyas gatau IV 27

225
ipa khepe = throwing || arrojar, I 121 ip a kepe VI 78

tirar; lanzar; descartar.
ipa saghte = accumulating; VIII ip a saghte X 138

agregar.
taka hasane = laughing (hsa) || I 11 tak a hasane I 120

rer; sonrer.
taki kicchajvane = difficult or I 11 tak i kicchrajvane I 121

painful living (kasirajvana) ||
vida difcil o dolorosa.
taki bandhane = binding || ligar; VIII ak i bandhane X 97

atar. 283
takka vitakke = thinking; reflecting VIII ......

|| pensar; reflexionar. 281
takka bhsya = speaking || VIII tark a bhrtha X 240

hablar. 283
56
(Smith).
57
d (Smith).
61
62
takkha tapane = restraining I 22 tak a tvacane I 695

(savaraa) || controlar;
restringir; contener.
taggha plane = protecting || proteger; I 29 dagh a ghtane plane ca V 27

cuidar. (Also Majar)
tagi gamane = going || ir. I 27 tag i gatyartha I 158

tvag i gatyartha I 159
taca savarae = protecting I 30 tvac a savarae VI 18

(rakkhaa) || proteger; cuidar.
tacca hisya = hurting || daar; I 30 ......

lastimar; herir.
taccha tanukarae = making thin; I 41 tak tankarae I 685

reducing || reducir. tvak tankarae I 686
tajja bhassane = scolding; I 44 tarj a bhartsane I 245

frightening || reprender;
asustar; atemorizar.
tajja santajjane = frightening; VIII tarj a satarjane X 142

menacing || asustar; 295
atemorizar; amenazar.
tacu gatiya = going || ir. I 30 tac u gatyartha I 206

tvac u gatyartha I 207
taa ussaye = to be upright (roha, I 53 ta a ucchrye I 330

ubbedha) || estar vertical;
ascender; elevacin; altura.
62
63
tai tane = beating; striking || I 58 ta i tane I 300

golpear; pegar.
tadi cetya = urging || incitar, I 91 trad i ceym I 69

instigar.
tadi hisndaresu = hurting and II ut td ir hisndarayo VII 9

disrespect || daar; lastimar; 215
herir y falta de respeto.
tadda hisya = hurting || daar; I 86 tard a hisym I 59

lastimar; herir.
tanu vitthre = spreading; VII tan u vistre VIII 1

enlarging || extender; 261
expandir; agrandar; ampliar.
tanu saddopatpesu = making VIII tan u raddhopakaraayo X 296

sound and tormenting || 322
producir sonido y atormentar.
tanta kuumbadhrae = supporting VIII tatr i kuumbadhrae X 139

a family || sustentar una 308
familia.
tapa dittiya = shining (virocana) I 122 tp a tptau? VI 24

|| brillar. X 276
tapa ubbege = terror (utrsa); dread I 122 trap lajjym? I 399

(bhrut) || terror; miedo.
tapa santpe = heating || calentar; I 122 tap a satpe I 1034

producir calor.
63
64
tapa santpe = heating || calentar; III tap a aivarye v? IV 51

producir calor. 235
tapa pane = gladdening; III tp a prane IV 86

satisfying || alegrar; regocijar; 235
satisfacer.
tapa58 khaye = exhaustion; VIII ......

destruccin.
tapa pane = gladdening; VIII tp a tptau X 276

satisfying || alegrar; regocijar; 327
satisfacer.
tapa dhe = burning || calor; VIII tap a dhe X 275

quemar; arder. 327
tapha tittiya = satisfying; satiating I 122 tp a tptau VI 24

(tappana) || satisfacer; saciar. tnph a tptau VI 25
taya gatiya = going || ir. I 139 tay a gatau I 508
tara plavana-taraesu = floating I 150 t plavana-taraayo I 1018

and crossing || flotar y cruzar,
atravesar.
tara sambhame = instability I 150 i tvar sabhrame I 812

(anavahna) || inestabilidad.
tala patihya = supporting || VIII tal a pratihym X 58

apoyar; soportar; mantener; 341
sostener.
58
thapa (Smith).
64
65
tasa pipsya = thirst || sed. III i t pipsym IV 118

239
tasa pipsya = thirst || sed. VI ......

258
tassa santajjane = frightening; VIII bharts a satarjane X 143

menacing || asustar; 346
atemorizar; amenazar.
taa tane = beating; striking || VIII ......

golpear; pegar. 350
taa ghte = anger; hatred || VIII ta a ghte X 43

enojo; odio; ira. 350
t plane = protecting || proteger; III trai plane I 1014

cuidar. 225
tyu santna-planesu = continuity I 144 ty satna-planayo I 518

and protecting || continuidad y
proteger; cuidar.
tsa vrae = obstructing; VIII tras a dhrae X 201

hindering (nivraa) || 347
obstruir; obstaculizar.
tika gatyatthe = going || ir. I 17 tik gatyartha I 105
tika hisya = hurting || daar; IV tik a gatau59 V 20

59
In DP gatau ca, ca indicating skandana also. En gatau ca, DP, ca indica tambin skandana.
65
66
tiga hisya = hurting || daar; IV tig a gatau60 V 20

tija nisne khamya ca = I 45 tij a nine (kamy ca, I 1020

sharpening (tikkhatkaraa) K)
and patience (khanti) || afilar;
aguzar y paciencia.
tija nisne = sharpening; VI ......

sharpness (tikkhat) || afilar; 259
aguzar.
tija nisne = sharpening || afilar; VIII tij a nine X 110

aguzar. 295
tiu adane = eating || comer. VII t u adane VIII 6

263
timu addabhve = wetness; I 131 tim a rdrbhve IV 16

moistness (tintabhva) || im a rdrbhve IV 17
humedad. m a rdrbhve IV 17
tira adhogatiya = going down || I 158 ......

ir abajo.
tila gatiya = going || ir. I 165 til a gatau I 567
tila sinehane = sticking || I 169 til a snehane VI 62

aglutinar, pegar.
tila sinehane = sticking || VIII til a snehane X 67

aglutinar, pegar. 340
60
In DP gatau ca, ca indicating skandana also. En gatau ca, DP, ca indica tambin skandana.
66
67
tiva61 thliye = thickness; bigness || I 170 tv a sthaulye I 597

estado de grueso o grande.
tisa tittiya = satiating; satisfying I 184 tvi a dptau? I 1050

|| satisfacer; saciar.
tra kammasampattiya = VIII tra karmasamptau X 364

completion of work; 336
accomplishing (kammassa
parisampana; nihpana) ||
conclusin de un trabajo;
lograr; consumar; realizar.
tuja hisya = hurting || daar; I 44 tuj a hisym I 263

lastimar; herir.
tuji balane hisya ca = ability I 44 tuj i plane (balane- I 264

(balanakriy) and hurting || Ktantra)
habilidad; capacidad y herir;
daar; lastimar.
tuji his-bala-dna-niketanesu = VIII tuj i his-baldna- X 30

hurting; force; strength; 294 niketaneu
giving and living (nivsa) ||
herir; daar; lastimar; fuerza;
dar y residir; habitar; vivir.
tuji bhsya = speaking || VIII tuj i bhrtha X 215

hablar. 295
61
tva (Smith).
67
68
tujja bala-planesu = force, VIII rj a bala-pranayo X 16

strength and protecting || 294
fuerza; poder y proteger;
cuidar.
tua kalahakammani = quarreling || I 54 tu a kalahakarmai VI 83

pelear; disputar.
tui toane = hurting; injuring || I 58 tu i toane I 295

herir; lastimar; matar.
tua koille = crookedness || I 61 du a kauilye VI 42

deshonestidad; cualidad de tu a kauilye VI 52
torcido. (DP)
tuda byathane = oppressing || I 105 tud a vyathane VI I

oprimir; daar; lastimar; herir
tupa hisya = hurting || daar; I 120 tup a hisrth I 431 I

lastimar; herir. trup a 433
tupha hisya = hurting || daar; I 122 tuph a hisym VI 27

lastimar; herir.
tubi addane = wetness; moistness || I 123 tub i ardane I 455

humedad. kub i ardane I 429
(DP)
tubbi62 hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 123 turv hisrtha I 601

lastimar; herir.
62
tubb (Smith).
68
69
tubha hisya = hurting || daar; I 129 tubh a hisym I 788

lastimar; herir. IV 131
IX 49
tula ummne = measuring || medir. VIII tul a unmne X 59

341
tuvaa nipajjya = lying down; VIII ......

sleeping || dormir; acostarse. 297
tusa sadde = making sound || I 175 tus a abde I 742

producir sonido.
tusa tuhiya = liking; III tu a prtau IV 75

satisfaction || agradar; 240
satisfacer.
tusi bhsya = speaking || VIII tras i bhrtha X 221

hablar. 347
tuhi addane = wetness; moistness || I 196 tuh ir ardane I 773

humedad.
tua toane = hurting; injuring || I 200 tu toane I 374

herir; lastimar; matar. tu a toane VI 92
ta prae = filling || llenar; VIII t a prae X 150

completar. 302
tla nikkarse = lightness I 164 tl a nikare I 560

(lahubhva) || liviandad,
levedad.
te plane = protecting I 62, trai plane I 1014

(rakkhaa) || proteger; cuidar. 209
69
70
thaka paighte = striking || golpear; VIII ak a pratighte I 819

pegar; chocar. 281
thaga savarae = restraining; I 28 ag e63 savarae I 827

thana sadde = making sound || I 112 stan a abde I 489

producir sonido. an a I 462
(DP)
thana devasadde = thundering VIII stana devaabde X 313

(megha-sadda) || tronar; 321
sonido de tormenta.
thapa thapane = placing; putting || VIII ......

colocar; poner. 327
thabhi paibaddhe = to be stiff || estar I 127 abh i pratibandhe I 413

rgido, duro, inflexible.
thama velambe = hanging down || I 133 am a vaikalye (avaikalye-DP I 883

colgar. I 855; avaiklavye-K;
vaiklavye-C.)
thara santharae = spreading; I 158 st cchdane cchdane V 6 IX

covering || extender; expandir; st 14
cubrir.
thala hne = standing || estar de I 167 sthal a sthne I 889

pie; detener el movimiento.
63
hag e (Katre).
70
71
thaha hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 198 sth hisrtha VI 69

lastimar; herir. (DP)
th gatinivattiya = stopping I 68 h gatinivttau I 975

from going; standing || detener
el movimiento; pararse.
thivu dittiya = shining || brillar. I 170 ......
thu thutiya = praising || elogiar; I 68 u stutau II 34

alabar.
thu abhitthave = praising || V ......

elogiar; alabar. 249
thu nitthunane = moaning; V ......

groaning || gemir, plair; 249
lamentar.
thuca pasde = clearness; brightness I 33 uc a prasde I 188

|| claridad; luminosidad.
thubbi64 hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 123 thurv hisrtha I 602

lastimar; herir.
thpa samussaye65 = height (roha, VIII p a samucchrye X 134

ubbedho) || altura; elevacin. 326 up a samucchrye X 139
(DP)
thla paribrhane = increasing; VIII sthla parivhae X 356

growing (vahana) || 344
aumentar; crecer; incrementar.
64
thubb (Smith).
65
samussye (Smith).
71
72
the sadda-saghtesu = making I 68, styai abda-saghtayo I 959

sound and accumulating; 209 yai abda-saghtayo I 959
collecting || producir sonido y
acumular; juntar; agregar.
thena coriye = theft (corassa bhva) VIII stena caurye X 349

|| robo; hurto. 322
thoma66 silghya = praising VIII stoma lghym X 377

(pasas) || elogiar; alabar. 311,
332
dasa dasane67 = stinging; biting || I 179 dan a daane I 1038

morder; picar.
dasa dasane = stinging; biting || VIII da i daane X 136

morder; picar. 346
dasu gatiya = going || ir. I 183 dhvas u avasrasane gatau ca I 793
daka assdane = tasting; enjoying || VIII rak a svdane X 197

gustar, saborear; disfrutar; 283
gozar de.
dakkha vuddhiya sghatte ca = I 25 dak a vddhau ighrrthe I 639

increasing; growing and ca
quickness || crecer; aumentar
y rapidez.
66
The entry on page 311 of Saddanti, Dhtuml, is given out of order. La raz en la pgina 311 del Saddanti,
Dhtuml, est fuera de orden.
67
dasane (Smith).
72
73
dakkha his-gatsu = hurting and I 26 dak a gatisanayo I 807

going || daar; lastimar; herir gatihisanayo (DP)
e ir.
dakhi ghoravsite kakhya ca = I 23 drk i ghoravsite I 701

making an unpleasant sound
and doubting || emitir un
sonido desagradable y dudar.
daa daavinipte = punishing || VIII daa daanipte X 381

castigar. 299
dadha dhrae = holding; bearing || I 108 dadh a dhrae I8

dadhi asghacre = acting slowly; I 109 ......

(asghappavatti) || actuar o
moverse lentamente.
dapa hse = laughing || rer; sonrer. III dp a hara-mohanayo IV 90

235
dapha gatiya = going || ir. I 122 raph a gatau (varpha-K) I 440
daphi gatiya = going || ir. I 122 raph i gatau (varpha-K) I 441
dabi sadde = making sound || I 124 rab i abde I 401

producir sonido.
dabhi sadde = making sound || I 127 rabh i abde (abde iti I 412
producir sonido. Durga)
dabhi ganthane = knitting; tying || I 129 dbh granthe VI 34

tejer; atar; entrelazar.
73
74
dabh bhaye = fearing || temer. VIII dbh bhaye X 278

330
dama gatimhi = going || ir. I 132 dram a gatau I 494
damu damane = taming || domar, III dam u upaame IV 94

amansar; domesticar; 237
entrenar.
daya dna-gati-his-dna- I 142 day a dna-gati-rakaa- I 510

rakkhsu = giving; going; hisdneu
hurting; taking; seizing and
protecting || dar; ir; herir;
daar; lastimar; tomar y
proteger; cuidar.
dara bhaye = fearing || temer. I 151 d bhaye I 846
dara darndaresu = respect and I 151 d dare VI 118

disrespect || respeto y falta de
respeto.
dara vidrae = splitting; rending || I 158 d vidrae IX 23

hende(i)r, partir; rajar; rasgar.
dara dhe = burning || calor; I 158 ......

quemar; arder.
dala visarae = splitting; bursting || I 162 dal a viarae I 581

partir; separar; rajar; abrirse;
romperse.
dala vidrae = rending; splitting || VIII dal a vidrae X 211

hende(i)r, partir; rajar; rasgar. 343
74
75
dalidda duggatiya = poverty (duk- I 104 daridr durgatau II 64

khassa gati patih) ||
pobreza; miseria.
dasi dassane dasane ca = seeing VIII das i darana-daanayo X 137

and stinging; biting || ver y 346
morder; picar.
dasi bhsya = speaking || VIII da i bhrtha X 224

hablar. 347
daha bhasmkarae dhrae ca = I 195 dah a bhasmkarae I 1040

burning and holding; bearing
|| quemar; hacer cenizas y
daha hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 198 th hisrth VI 58

lastimar; herir. tnh hisrth VI 58
dahi vuddhiya = increasing; I 196 dh a vddhau I 769

growing || crecer; aumentar. dh i vddhau I 770
d dne = giving || dar. I 74 d u d dne I 977

III 9
d kucchite gamane = despicable I 82 dr kutsy gatau II 45

going; being despicable || ir
(caminar) inapropiadamente;
ser detestable.
d sodhane = cleansing || limpiar; III dai p odhane I 971

purificar; depurar. 225
75
76
d supane = sleeping || dormir. III drai svapne I 955

226
d dne = giving || dar. III ......

226
d avakhaane = breaking into III do avakhaane IV 40

pieces; destroying || destruir; 226
romper; rasgar.
d suddhiya = purity || pureza; III ......

purificacin. 226
dkha sosanlamatthesu = making I 21 drkh oalamarthayo I 128

dgha yse smatthiye ca = fatigue I 29 drgh smarthye, drgh I 115,

(kilamana) and ability || yme ca (yse ca, 117
fatiga, cansancio y habilidad; Ks)
capacidad.
dna avakhaane = breaking into I 113 dn a khaane I 1043

pieces; destroying || destruir; (avakhaane-K)
romper; rasgar.
dsa hisya = hurting || daar; IV d a hisym V 33

dsu dne = giving || dar. I 184 d dne I 931

ds dne I 942
76
77
dhu niddakkhaye = awakening || I 197 dh nidrkaye I 677

despertar (lit. destruccin del
sueo).
da visarae = spreading; I 200 dr viarae I 307

pervading || extender;
difundir; propagar; penetrar;
esparcir.
dikkha muiypanayana-niyama- I 25 dk a mauyejyopanayan I 640

bbat-desesu = shaving the a-niyama-vrat-
head; initiating; restraining; deeu
practice and pointing out ||
rapar; iniciar, ordenar; limitar,
restringir; prctica, deber y
sealar, indicar.
dikkha hisya = hurting || daar; IV ri ki hisym V 30

lastimar; herir. 246 hisym (kka-C.) V 31
dica thutiya = praising || elogiar; I 31 c a stutau VI 19

alabar.
dipha kathana-yuddha-nind-his- I 122 riph a katthana-yuddha- VI 23

dnesu = talking; fighting; nind-hisdneu
blaming; hurting and taking;
seizing || hablar; luchar,
pelear; reprochar, criticar;
daar, lastimar y tomar; asir,
agarrar.
77
78
divu k-vijigis-byavahra-juti- III div u kra-vijig- IV 1

thuti-kanti-gati-sattsu = 219 vyavahra-dyuti-
sporting; charming (ramaa); stuti-moda-mada-
living (vihra); wish to svapna-knti-gatiu
conquer (vijayicch); trading
(vohra); splendor (sobh);
praising (thoman); beauty
(kamanyat); going
(gamana); ability (smatthiya)
|| jugar; encantar; fascinar;
residir; habitar; vivir; deseo
de conquistar; comerciar;
trocar; esplendor; elogiar;
alabar; belleza; ir; habilidad;
capacidad.
divu parikjane = roaring (gajjana) VIII div u parikjane X 166

|| rugir, bramar. 344
divu addane = inflicting; VIII div u mardane (ardane- X 185

tormenting68 || infligir; 345 K)
atormentar.
disa hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 ri a hisrtha I 725

lastimar; herir.
disa pekkhane = seeing || ver; I 176 d ir prekae I 1037

mirar.
68
Some say addana means gandhapisana (crushing fragrant substance). Saddanti page 345. Algunos dicen
que addana significa gandhapisana (moler una sustancia fragante). Saddanti pg. 345.
78
79
disa dna-savaraesu = taking I 184 jha a dna-savaraayo I 940

and restraining; protecting ||
tomar; asir y controlar;
disa atisajjane = giving; preaching I 189 di a atisarjane VI 3

|| dar; predicar; instruir.
dis apptiya = disliking || I 187 dvi a aprtau II 3

disgustar; desagradar.
dis uccrae = uttering || VIII ......

pronunciar; articular; hablar; 349
decir.
diha upacaye = accumulation || I 197 dih a upacaye II 5

acumular.
d khaye = exhaustion; III d kaye IV 26

destruccin.
ddhi ditti-vedhanesu69 = shining I 110 ddh dpti-devanayo II 67

and piercing || brillar y
perforar; atravesar; penetrar.
dpa dittiya = shining || brillar. III dp dptau IV 42

235
du gatiya = going || ir. I 82 du dru gatau I 991 I

992
69
devanesu (Smith).
79
80
du70 paritpe = tormenting || III d paritpe IV 25

atormentar. 226
du hisya = hurting || daar; IV d hisym V 34

du71 hisya = hurting || daar; V dr hisym IX 11

dukkha takriyya = experiencing I 19 dukha tatkriyym X 384

that = suffering (dukkhya
vedanya kriy) ||
experimentar eso
(sufrimiento).
dua gatiya hisya ca = going I 61 dru a his-gati- VI 47

and hurting || ir y daar; kauilyeu
lastimar; herir.
dupha upakkilese = impurity; I 122 dph a utklee VI 28

defiling (upakkilissana) || dnph a utklee VI 29
impureza; ensuciar; manchar;
contaminar.
dubi addane = inflicting; VIII tub i adarane, ardane ity X 115

tormenting; hurting (his) || 328 eke
infligir; atormentar; daar;
lastimar; herir.
dubbi72 hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 123 durv hisrtha I 603

lastimar; herir.
70
d (Smith).
71
d (Smith).
80
81
dula ukkhepe = throwing up VIII dul a utkepe X 60

(uddha khipana) || tirar o 342
arrojar hacia arriba.
dusa dosane = offending; angering III du a vaiktye IV 76

|| ofender; causar enojo; 239
molestar.
dusa apptiya = disliking || III dvi a aprtau II 33

disgustar; desagradar. 239
duha paprae = filling || llenar; I 197 duh a praprae II 4

completar.
duhi addane = wetness; moistness || I 196 duh ir ardane I 774

humedad.
dbha73 santhambhe = supporting || VIII dbh a sandarbhe X 279

de sodhane = cleansing I 82 dai p odhane I 971

(pariyodpana) || limpiar;
purificar; depurar.
de plane = protecting || proteger; I 83, de rakae I 1011

cuidar. 209
72
dubb (Smith).
73
dubha (Smith).
81
82
deka sadd-usshesu = making I 16 drek abdotshayo I 78

sound (rava) and striving
(vyama) || producir sonido y
esforzar(se).
dea74 paribhsane = abusing; I 54 re paribhae I 917

censurar.
debha sadde = making sound || I 127 rebh abde I 410

producir sonido.
deva devane = lamenting; I 171 dev devane I 529

sorrowing || lamentar; sentir
pesar.
devu devane = lamenting; I 171 tev devane I 528

sorrowing || lamentar; sentir
pesar.
devu plutagatiya = going jumping I 171 rev plavagatau I 540

(pariplutagamana) || ir a
saltos.
desu abyattasadde = inarticulate I 181 re avyakte abde I 651

dvara savarae = restraining; I 150 dv v varae I 981

protecting (rakkha) || I 959
controlar; restringir; contener; (DP)
proteger.
74
deu (Smith).
82
83
dhaka paighte gatiya ca = striking I 12 ak a pratighte I 819

(paihanana) and going ||
golpear; pegar; chocar e ir.
dhakhi ghoravsite kakhya ca = I 23 dhrk i ghoravsite I 702

making an unpleasant sound dhvk i ghoravsite I 703
and doubting || emitir un
sonido desagradable y dudar.
dhaja gatiya = going || ir. I 42 dhraj a gatau I 232

dhj a gatau I 236
dhvaj a gatau I 238
dhaji gatiya = going || ir. I 42 dhraj i gatau I 233

dhj i gatau I 237
dhvaj i gatau I 239
dhana dhae = prosperity I 116 dhan a dhnye III 23

(dhanana) || prosperidad.
dhana sadde = making sound || I 112 dhvan a abde I 854

producir sonido.
dhana sadde = making sound || VIII dvana abde X 343

dhanu ycane = begging || pedir; III ......

mendigar. 231
dhama sadd-aggisayogesu = I 132 dhm abdgnisayogayo I 974

making sound and starting a
fire by blowing || producir
sonido y encender un fuego
soplando.
83
84
dhara dharae = existing I 153 dh dhrae I 948

(vijjamnat) || existir.
dhara aviddhasane = non- I 153 dh avadhvasane (see I 1009

destroying || no destruir. Kappa k)
dhara avatthne = standing; I 158 dh avasthne VI 119

remaining || permanecer; estar
de pie; estar situado.
dhara dhrae = holding; bearing || VIII ......

sostener; soportar; mantener. 336
dhasa uche = gleaning || espigar. VIII udhras a uche X 202

347
dh dhrae = holding; bearing || I 105 u dh dhraa-poaayo III 10

dhkha sosanlamatthesu = making I 21 dhrkh oalamarthayo I 129

dhvu gatisuddhiya = clear going; I 171 dhv u gati-uddhayo I 632

running || correr; puro ir.
dha visarae = spreading; I 200 dhr viarae I 308

pervading || extender;
esparcir.
84
85
dhikkha sandpana-kilesana-jvanesu = I 23 dhik a sadpana-kleana- I 634

shining, defiling and living || jvaneu
brillar; ensuciar; manchar;
contaminar; vivir; existir.
dhimha nihubhane = spitting || I 200 ......

escupir.
dhivu75 nidassane = pointing out; I 170 hiv u nirasane I 592

indicating || sealar; indicar;
explicar.
dhivu76 nidassane77 = pointing out; III hiv u nirasane IV 4

indicating || sealar; indicar; 238
explicar.
dhisa sadde = making sound || I 189 dhi a abde III 22

producir sonido.
dh andare = disrespect || falta de III dh dhre (andare-C.) IV 28

respeto. 231
dhu gati-theriyesu = going and I 107 dhru gati-sthairyayo VI 107

firmness || ir y firmeza;
constancia.
dhukkha sandpana-kilesana-jvanesu = I 23 dhuk a sadpana-kleana- I 633

shining, defiling and living || jvaneu
brillar; ensuciar; manchar;
contaminar; vivir; existir.
75
hivu (Smith).
76
hivu (Smith).
77
nirasane (Smith).
85
86
dhubbi78 hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 123 dhurv hisrtha I 604

lastimar; herir.
dh vidhnane = trembling; I 107 dh vidhnane VI 105

shaking || temblar; sacudir.
dh kampane = trembling || V dh kampane IX 17

dh kampane = trembling || VIII dh kampane X 292

dhpa santpe = heating || calentar; I 122 dhp a satpe I 423

producir calor.
dhpa bhsya = speaking || VIII dhp a bhrtha X 232

hablar. 327
dhra79 hucchane = crookedness I 150 dhv hrchane I 986

(koilla) || deshonestidad;
cualidad de torcido.
dhsa kantikarae = beautifying || VIII dhs a kntikarae X 98

embellecer. 346
dhe pne = drinking || beber. I 107 dhe pne I 951
dhe80 sadda-saghtesu = making I 209 yai abda-saghtayo I 959

sound and accumulating;
78
dhubb (Smith).
79
dhura (Smith).
80
he (Smith).
86
87
dheka sadd-usshesu = making I 16 dhrek abdotshayo I 79

sound (rava) and striving
(vyama) || producir sonido y
esforzar(se).
dhora gaticturiye = skillfulness in I 146 dhor gaticturye I 585

going (gatichekabhva) ||
destreza o habilidad en ir.
dhovu dhovane = washing || lavar; I 170 ......

limpiar.
nakka nsane = destroying || VIII nakk a nane X 54

nakkha sambandhe = connecting || VIII ......

conectar; ligar. 284
nakkha gatiya = going || ir. I 22 ak a gatau I 692
nakha gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 akh a gatyartha I 138
naa natiya = bending || doblar. I 53 na a ntau I 332

a a ntau I 818
naa avasandane = dancing; VIII na a avasyandane X 12

bending the body 296
(gattavikkhepa) || danzar;
doblar el cuerpo o los
miembros.
87
88
nata gattavinme = dancing; III nt gtravikepe IV 9

bending the body 225
(gattavikkhepa) || danzar;
doblar el cuerpo o los
miembros.
nada abyattasadde = inarticulate I 84 ad a avyakte abde I 55

nada bhsya = speaking || VIII ad a bhrtha X 238

hablar. 313
nadda sadde = making sound || I 86 nard a abde I 57

producir sonido.
nanda samiddhiya = success; I 90 u nad i samddhau I 67

prosperity || xito;
prosperidad.
nabha hisya = hurting || daar; I 129 abh a hisym bhve pi I 788

lastimar; herir. IV 130
IX 48
nama bahutte sadde = loud sound I 132 am a prahvatve abde ca I 1030

(uggatasadda) || sonido fuerte.
namassa vandannatiya = bowing I 172 ......

down (vandansakhta
namana) || hacer reverencia
inclinar(se).
namu namane = bending; inclining || I 133 ......

inclinar(se); doblar(se).
88
89
naya rakkhae gatiya ca = I 142 ay a gatau I 509

protecting and going ||
proteger e ir.
nara nayane = leading || guiar; I 151 n naye I 847

conducir; llevar.
nala ganthe81 = tying; making a I 167 al a gandhe (bandhane ity I 891

knot || atar; amarrar; hacer un eke)
nudo.
nasa koille = crookedness || I 183 as a kauilye I 658

torcido.
nasa adassane = not seeing; III a a adarane IV 85

ausencia; no ver.
naha bandhane = binding || ligar; III ah a bandhane IV 57

atar. 240
ntha ycanpatp-issariysssu82 I 71, nth ycopatpaivaryu I7

= begging; vexation, trouble; 210
supremacy, domination and
wish, hope, desire || pedir;
mendigar; molestia;
perturbacin; dificultad;
supremaca y deseo;
esperanza.
81
gandhe (Smith).
82
sissu (Smith).
89
90
ndha ycandsu = begging, etc. (as I 109, ndh ycopatpaivary- I6

above) || pedir; mendigar; 210 su
molestia; perturbacin;
dificultad; supremaca y
deseo; esperanza.
nsu sadde = making sound || I 182 s abde I 656

producir sonido.
nikka parime = measuring || VIII nik a parime X 147

medir. 283
nikkha cumbane = kissing || besar. I 22 ik a cumbane I 687
niji abyattasadde = inarticulate I 47 ij i avyakte abde II 17

niji suddhiya = purity || pureza; I 47 ij i uddhau II 16

purificacin.
nitami kilamane = fatigue; weariness I 131 ......

|| fatiga; cansancio.
nida kucch-sannikarisesu = I 97 id kuts-sannikarayo I 921

reproaching, blaming (garah)
and to be near || reprochar,
criticar y estar cerca.
nidi kucchya = reproaching; I 89 id i kutsym I 66

blaming (garahattha) ||
reprochar, criticar; culpar.
90
91
nidapi nidampane = removing seeds I 121 ......

and leaves without cutting or
breaking the plant || quitar las
semillas y las hojas sin cortar
o daar la planta.
niva83 thliye = thickness; bigness || I 170 v a sthaulye I 598

nivsa acchdane = clothing; VIII nivsa cchdane X 339

covering || cubrir; arropar, 347
vestir.
nisa samdhimhi = putting I 176 i a samdhau I 758

together; unification of mind
(samdhna, cittekaggat) ||
unificacin de la mente;
concentracin.
nisa baddhya84 = bondage; I 190 mi a spardhym VI 60

attachment (vinibaddha) ||
esclavitud; apego.
nis cumbane = kissing || besar. I 187 is i cumbane II 15
nisu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 174 i u seke-Kalpadruma

n naye = leading; guiding || I 110 n naye I 847

guiar; conducir; llevar.
83
nva (Smith).
84
phaddhya (Smith).
91
92
n ppane = reaching; leading || I 112 prpae I 950

alcanzar; realizar; llegar,
arribar; guiar; conducir;
llevar.
nla vae = color || color. I 163 il a vare I 555
nu thutiya = praising || elogiar; I 112 u stutau II 26

alabar.
nuda perae = grinding; crushing I 105 ud a prerae VI 2

(cuikaraa, pisana) || VI 132
neda kucch-sannikarisesu = I 97 ed r kuts-sannikarayo I 921

reproaching, blaming (garah)
and to be near || reprochar,
criticar y estar cerca.
nesu gatiya = going || ir. I 181 e gatau I 648
nh soceyye = purifying; cleaning III n auce II 43

|| pureza; purificacin; 240
purificar; limpiar.
pasu avasasane = hanging down; I 183 sras u avasrasane I 790

falling down || colgar; caer.
pakka85 ncagatiya = going or I 10 phakk a ncair gatau I 119

existing low (hnagamana,
hnappavatti) || ir o existir
bajo.
85
phakka (Smith).
92
93
paca byattikarae86 = making I 33 pac i vyaktkarae I 187

manifest, clear or distinct ||
hacer manifiesto.
paca sapke = cooking well || I 34 pc saparcane II 20

cocinar bien; cocer. saparke (saparke- VII 25
K)
paca pke = cooking || cocinar; I 34 u pac a pke I 1045

cocer.
paci vitthre = spreading; VIII pac i vistvacane X 109

expanding || extender; 292
pacca sayamane = restraining; VIII pc a sayamane X 265

abstaining || controlar; 293
restringir; contener;
abstenerse.
paha pucchya = questioning || I 194 ......

interrogar, preguntar, inquirir.
paha icchya = wishing; desiring; I 195 pra(c)ch a jpsym VI 120

longing || desear; anhelar. VI 133
(DP)
paa gatiya = going || ir. I 53 pa a gatau I 317
paa bhsya = speaking || VIII pa a bhrtha X 212

hablar. 297
86
vyattkarae (Smith).
93
94
paa ganthe = tying; making a knot VIII paa granthe X 311

|| atar; amarrar; hacer un nudo. 297
paha viyattiya vcya = I 56 pah a vyakty vci I 466

articulado.
paha vikhyne = to be manifest || I 57 prath a prakhyne I 802

manifestacin; aparecer. X 19
pai gatiya = going || ir. I 58 pa i gatau I 301
pai parihse = laughing || rer; VIII sphu i parihse ity api X4

sonrer. 298 sphu i
pai saghte = accumulating; VIII pi i saghte X 131

agregar.
paa byavahre thutiya ca = I 61 pa a vyavahre stutau ca I 466

trading; exchanging; doing
business and praising ||
comerciar; intercambiar y
elogiar; alabar.
paa byavahre = trading; VIII ......

exchanging; doing business || 305
comerciar; intercambiar.
paa harite = being green; being VIII para haritabhve X 392

fresh || estar verde; estar 304
fresco.
pata gatiya = going || ir. I 63 pat gatau I 898
94
95
pata gatiya = going || ir. VIII pata gatau v X 315

309
pattha ycanya = begging || pedir; VIII ......

mendigar. 311
patha gatiya = going || ir. I 73 path e gatau I 898
pathi gatiya = going || ir. VIII path i gatau X 39

310
pada gatiya = going || ir. III pad a gatau IV 60

227
pada gatiya = going || ir. VIII pada gatau X 350

314
pana sadde = making sound || I 112 van a abde I 490

producir sonido.
panu dne = giving || dar. VII a u dne VIII 2

263
pabba gatiya = going || ir. I 123 parb a gatau I 443
pabba prae = filling || llenar; I 124 parv a prae I 608

completar.
paya gatiya = going || ir. I 139 pay a gatau I 505
para plana-praesu = protecting I 154 p plana-praayo III 4

and filling || proteger, cuidar y
llenar; completar.
95
96
para gatiya = going || ir. VIII ......

335
pala lavana-pavanesu = cutting VIII palyla lavana-pavanayo X 335

(chedana) and cleansing; 344
cleaning (sodhana) || cortar y
limpiar; purificar.
pala gatiya = going || ir. VIII ......

344
palusu upadhe = burning || calor; I 174 plu u dhe I 737

quemar; arder.
pasa vitthre = spreading; I 183 pras a vistre I 803

expanding || extender;
pasa bdhana-phassanesu = I 184 spa a bdhana-sparanayo I 936

afflicting and touching;
contacting || afligir; afectar y
tocar.
pasa bandhane = binding || ligar; VIII pa a bandhane X 179

atar. 346
pasi nsane = destroying || VIII pas i nae X 74

p pne = drinking || beber. I 117 p pne I 972
p rakkhae = protecting || I 118 p rakae II 47

proteger; cuidar.
96
97
p prae = filling || llenar; I 118 pr prae II 52

completar.
pyi87 vuddhiya = increasing; I 144 o pyy vddhau I 517

growing || crecer; aumentar.
pra kammasampattiya = VIII pra karmasamptau X 363

completion of work; 336
accomplishing (kammassa
parisampana; nihpana) ||
conclusin de un trabajo;
lograr; consumar; realizar.
pla rakkhae = protecting || VIII pl a rakae X 69

piji his-bala-dna-niketanesu = VIII pij i his-baldna- X 31

hurting; force, strength; 294 niketaneu
giving and living (nivsa) ||
herir; daar; lastimar; fuerza;
piji bhsya = speaking || VIII pij i bhrtha X 217

hablar. 295
pia sadda-saghesu = making I 53 pi a abda-saghtayo I 318

sound and accumulating;
acumular.
87
py (Smith).
97
98
piha his-sakilesesu = hurting I 56 pih a his- I 362

and defiling || daar; lastimar; sakleanayo
contaminar.
pii saghte = accumulating; I 58 pi i saghte I 293

agregar.
pila88 gahae = taking || tomar. I 169 il a gahane? VI 68
pila khepe = throwing || arrojar, VIII vil a kepe X 65

pilahi gatiya = going || ir. I 196 plih a gatau I 673
piva89 thliye = thickness; bigness || I 170 pv a sthaulye I 595

pisa cuane = grinding; crushing II pi sacrane VII 15

|| aplastar; moler; triturar. 216
pisa bala-panesu = force, VIII ......

strength and breathing || 345
fuerza; poder y respirar.
pisa pesane = sending || enviar; VIII pis a gatau X 32

mandar. 348
pisi gatiya = going || ir. I 176 pis gatau I 751
88
mila (Smith).
89
pva (Smith).
98
99
pisi bhsya = speaking || VIII pis i bhrtha X 222

hablar. 347
pisu upadhe = burning || calor; I 174 ri u dhe I 733

quemar; arder.
pisu avayave = limb; part; I 189 pi a avayave VI 143

constituent || miembro; parte;
componente.
piha icchya = wishing; desiring VIII spha psym X 325

|| desear. 349
piadhi alakhre = decorating; I 109 ......

ornamenting || ornamentar;
decorar; adornar.
p tappana-kantsu = to be V pr tarpae kntau ca IX 2

pleased and to like || estar 252
satisfecho, complacerse y
gustar.
p ptiya = joy || alegra; IV p prtau V 12

regocijo. 245
pa pane = gladdening; I 61 p a prane VI 40

satisfying (paripuat) ||
alegrar; regocijar; satisfacer.
pa avaghane = inflicting; VIII p a avaghane X 11

tormenting || afligir; 350
atormentar.
pu gatiya = going || ir. I 209 pru gatau I 1006
99
100
puccha pahe = questioning || I 39 pra(c)ch jpsym VI 120

interrogar, preguntar, inquirir. VI 133
(DP)
pua sakilesane = afflicting; I 54 pu a saleae VI 74

defiling; smearing || afligir;
afectar; ensuciar; manchar;
contaminar.
pua hisya = hurting || daar; VIII sphi a hisym X 91

pua vibhede = dividing || dividir. VIII ......

297
pua bhsya = speaking || VIII pu a bhrtha X 213

hablar. 297
pua appabhve = smallness; VIII pu a alpbhve X 24

poquedad.
pua nipue = to be clever; to be I 61 pu a karmai ubhe VI 43

skillful || ser hbil; ser diestro;
ser inteligente.
pua90 saghte = accumulating; VIII pl a saghte, X 94

collecting || acumular; juntar; 302 pr a ity Eke,
agregar. pu a ity Anye
90
pa (Smith).
100
101
puttha darndaresu = respect and VIII pust a darndarayo X 52

disrespect || respeto y falta de 311 bust a darndarayo X 52
respeto.
putha bhsya = speaking || VIII puth a bhrtha X 235

hablar. 311
putha pahre = striking; hitting || VIII ......

golpear; pegar. 311
puthi his-sakilesesu = hurting I 71 puth i his-sakleanayo I 45

and defiling || daar; lastimar;
contaminar.
puthu vitthre = spreading; I 74 pth u vistre K

expanding || extender; 1.513
punsa abhimaddane = crushing; VIII pus a abhivardhane (- X 95

subjugating || aplastar; 345 mardane-K)
triturar; subyugar.
puppha vikasane = expanding; I 122 pup a vikasane IV 15

blooming; opening up ||
expanderse; florecer; abrirse.
pubba prae = filling || llenar; I 124 purv a prae I 607

completar. prv a I 577
(DP)
pubba niketane = living (nivsa) || VIII gurd a prvaniketane X 126

residir; habitar; vivir. 328 Pryae dvau dht
(K)
101
102
pura aggagamane = going first; I 156 pur a agragamane VI 56

leading (padhnagamana,
pahamam eva gamana v) ||
ir primero; liderar.
pula91 saghte = accumulating; I 164 pl a saghte I 561

agregar.
pula mahatte = greatness || I 168 pul a mahattve I 894

grandeza.
pusa92 buddhiya = knowing || I 173 p a vddhau I 706

pusa93 pasave = growing; bringing I 173 a prasave I 710

forth || crecer; aumentar;
producir; generar; procrear.
pusa posane = nourishing || nutrir; I 174 pu a puau I 732

alimentar.
pusa sineha-savana-praesu = oil, V pru a snehana-sevana- IX 55

sticking; hearing and filling || 256 plu a praesu IX 56
aceite, aglutinar, pegar; oir,
escuchar y llenar; completar.
pusa posane = nourishing || nutrir; V pu a puau IX 57

alimentar. 256
91
pla (Smith).
92
See note at cusa. Ver nota en cusa.
93
psa (Smith).
102
103
pusa posane = nourishing || nutrir; VIII pu a dhrae X 210

alimentar. 345
pusa dhrae = holding; bearing || VIII pu a dhrae X 210

sostener; soportar; mantener. 347
pusu upadhe = burning || calor; I 174 pru u dhe I 736

quemar; arder.
pua sukhane = happiness || I 201 p a sukhane VI 39

felicidad.
pua saghte = accumulating; I 201 pu a utsarge? VI 90

agregar.
p pavane = cleansing (sodhana) I 118 p pavane I 1015

|| limpiar; purificar.
p pavane = cleansing (sodhana) V p pavane IX 12

|| limpiar; purificar. 252
pja pjya = venerating; VIII pj a pjym X 101

py visarae duggandhe ca = I 143 py i viarae durgandhe I 513

spreading (vippharaa) and ca
bad smell || extender; difundir;
mal olor.
pra prae = filling || llenar; I 146 p plana-praayo III 4

completar. p plana-praayo IX 19
p prae X 15
103
104
pri appyane = fulfilling || VIII pr pyyane X 261

completar; cumplir; satisfacer. 335
pe gatiya = going || ir. I 119 ......
pe vuddhiya = increasing; I 120 pyai vddhau I 1013

pe sosane = making dry || secar. I 120 pai oae I 968
pelu gatiya = going || ir. I 165 pel gatau I 574
pesa paiharae = bringing back || VIII ......

traer; devolver. 345
pesu gatiya = going || ir. I 176 pes gatau I 752
potha pariyyanabhve94 = going I 74 proth paryptau I 919

round || ir dar vueltas; ir
alrededor.
plu gatiya = going || ir. I 209 plu gatau I 1007
phaa gatiya = going || ir. I 61 pha a gatau I 873
phara pharae = pervading; I 156 sphur a sacalane, sphurae, VI 95

spreading; going (bypana, sphara ity Anye VI 109
gamana) || difundir; propagar; -10
penetrar; esparcir; expandir; (DP)
extender; ir.
94
pariypanabhve (Smith).
104
105
phala visarae = splitting; cracking I 162 i phal a viarae I 549

|| partir; separar; rajar; abrirse;
romperse.
phala nibbattiya95 = producing; I 164 phal a nipattau I 563

giving fruit || producir; dar
fruto.
phala abyattasadde = inarticulate I 164 ......

phala bhede = breaking; dividing || I 164 i phal viarae I 549

romper; dividir.
phyi96 vuddhiya = increasing; I 144 sphy vddhau I 516

phla vilekhane = scratching || I 167 hal a vilekhane I 890

rayar; escribir.
phucha visarae = spreading; I 39 sphurch visttau (vismtau- I 228

pervading || extender; Ks)
esparcir.
phua visarae = spreading; I 54 sphu a vikasane VI 80

bursting; splitting ||
extendirse; difundir; partir;
separar; rajar; abrirse;
romperse.
95
nipphattiya (Smith).
96
phy (Smith).
105
106
phua vikasane = blooming; I 54 sphu a vikasane VI 80

opening; expanding ||
expandirse; abrirse; florecer.
phua vibhede = dividing || dividir. VIII sphu a bhedane X 182

297
phua vikirae vidhunane ca = I 62 ......

scattering and shaking ||
esparcir, diseminar,
desparramar, dispersar y
temblar; sacudir.
phula sacale pharae ca = I 169 sphul a sacalane VI 96

trembling, shaking and phul a sacalane VI 110
pervading; spreading || (DP)
temblar; sacudir y difundir;
propagar; penetrar; esparcir;
extender.
phulla vikasana-bhedesu = I 165 phull a vikasane I 565

blooming; opening;
expanding and breaking;
dividing || florecer; abrirse;
expandirse y romper; dividir.
phusa samphasse = touching; I 189 sp a saparane VI 128

contacting || tocar.
106
107
bada theriye = firmness I 84 vad a sthairye I 51

(thirabhva) || firmeza; (DP)
constancia.
baddha97 saharise = binding (vinibad- I 108 spardh a saghare I3

dhakriy) || ligar; atar.
badha bandhane = binding || ligar; VIII badh a bandhane I 1022

atar. 320
bandha bandhane = binding || ligar; I 109 badh a bandhane I 1022

atar.
bala pane = breathing; living I 167 bal a prane-dhnyvarodhane ca I 893

(jvana) || respirar; existir. val a or -dhnyvarodhe ca I 865
(DP)
bahi vuddhiya = increasing; I 196 bh a vddhau I 771

growing || crecer; aumentar. bh i vddhau I 772
bahi vuddhiya sadde ca = I 196 bh i vddhau abde ca I 737

increasing; growing and bh ir ity Eke (DP)
making sound || crecer;
aumentar y producir sonido.
bdha viloane = stirring || revolver; I 108 bdh viloane I5

menear; batir.
bila98 patitthambhe = supporting || I 162 pl a pratiambhe I 554

apoyar; soportar; mantener;
sostener; base; apoyo.
97
bandha (Smith).
98
bla (Smith).
107
108
bia akkose = insulting; abusing || I 200 bi a kroe; I 339

insultar; agraviar. vi a nto yam iti Nand I 318
(K) (DP)
bukka bhassane = barking (sunakha- I 11 bukk a bhaae I 122

bhassana) || ladrar.
bukka bhassane = barking (sunakha- VIII bukk a bhaae X 173

bhassana) || ladrar. 283
buja99 vajiranibbese100 = thundering I 43 u o sphurj vajranirghoe I 254

|| tronar, sonido de tormenta.
budha bodhane = knowing || I 110 budh ir bodhane (budha-K) I 924

budha avagamane = knowing III budh a avagamane IV 63

(jnana) || conocer; 228
comprender.
budha bodhane = knowing (jnana); III ......

opening up (vikasana) and 230
awakening (niddakkhaya) ||
conocer; comprender; abrirse
y despertar.
budhi hisya = hurting || daar; VIII ......

99
phja (Smith).
100
vajiranipphese (Smith).
108
109
bundi nisne = sharpening; to be I 97 u bund ir nimane I 925

sharp (tejana, tikkhat) ||
afilar; aguzar.
bua101 savarae = restraining; I 201 vru a savarae VI 99

belu gatiya = going || ir. I 165 phel gatau I 575
byatha dukkha-bhaya-calanesu = I 73 vyath a bhaya-sacalanayo I 801

suffering, fearing and
trembling || sufrir; temer y
byadha tane = beating; striking || III vyadh a tane IV 72

golpear; pegar. 232
byaya khaye = exhaustion; VIII vya kepe K.

destruction || agotar, acabar; 334 10.84
destruccin.
byaya cittasamussagge102 = VIII vyaya vittasamutsarge X 386

relinquishing ones mind || 334
abandonar la mente.
by ummsane103 = opening the I 138 ......

eyes || abrir los ojos.
byca byjikarae104 = deceiving I 31 vyac a vyjkarae VI 12

(byjikriy) || engaar.
101
phua (Smith).
102
vittasamussagge = squandering ones wealth (Smith); gastar la propia riqueza.
103
ummisane (Smith).
109
110
byusa105 ussagge = rejecting; emiting || VIII pya ka utsji (Kalpadruma)

descartar; rechazar; desechar. 346
bye savarae = restraining; I 139 vye savarae I 1056

bye pavattiya = existing; I 139 ......

happening || existir; ocurrir;
suceder, acontecer.
braha uggame = rising; going up || I 198 vh udyamane VI 57

surgir; salir; aparecer. bh ity anye
br viyattiya vcya = I 145 br vyakty vci II 35

articulado.
brha vahane = growing; I 198 bh a vddhau I 771

increasing || crecer; aumentar.
bhasu avasasane = hanging down; I 183 bhras u avasrasane I 792

falling down || colgar; caer.
bhakkha adane = eating || comer. VIII bhak a adane X 22

284
bhaja sevya = associating; I 47 bhaj a sevym I 1047

serving || asociar(se); servir.
bhaja pke = cooking || cocinar; I 47 bhrasj a pke VI 4

cocer.
104
vyjkarae (Smith).
105
vyasa (Smith). See Monier 1010.
110
111
bhaja vissse = confiding; trusting || VIII bhaj a virane X 194

confiar. 295
bhaji bhajjane = heating; frying; I 44 bhj bharjane I 191

roasting (tpakaraa) ||
calentar; producir calor; freir;
asar.
bhaji bhsya = speaking || VIII bhaj i bhrtha X 219

hablar. 295
bhaa bhattiya = devoting; serving I 53 bha a bhtau I 329

|| dedicar; servir.
bhaa paribhsane = abusing; I 54 bha a paribhae I 817

censurar.
bhai paribhsane = abusing; I 58 bha i paribhae I 292

censurar.
bhai kalye = goodness VIII bha i kalye X 50

(kalyat) || bondad; estado 299
de bueno.
bhaa sadde = making sound || I 59 bha a abdrtha I 474

producir sonido. bra a abdrtha I 479
bhaa bhaane = telling; expounding I 60 ......

|| decir; anunciar; exponer.
111
112
bhadi kalle sokhiye ca = goodness I 91 bhad i kalyae sukhe ca I 12

(kalya) and happiness
(sukhino bhvo) || bondad,
bueno y felicidad.
bhabba hisya = hurting || daar; I 123 bharv a hisym I 611

lastimar; herir.
bhara posane = nourishing || nutrir; I 158 bh u bh bharae dhraa- I 946

alimentar. poaayo III 5
bhala paribhsana-hisdnesu = I 166 bhal a paribhaa- I 524

abusing; blaming; censuring; hisdneu
hurting and taking; seizing ||
censurar; daar; herir;
lastimar y tomar.
bhalla paribhsana-hisdnesu = I 166 bhall a paribhaa- I 525

abusing; blaming; censuring; hisdneu
hurting and taking; seizing ||
lastimar y tomar.
bhasa gahae = taking || tomar. VIII gras a grahae X 209

347
bhassa bhassane = talking; I 174 bha a bhartsane I 726

conversing (kathana) || hablar;
conversar.
112
113
bhassa bhassana-dittsu = speaking I 189 bhas a bhartsana-dptyo III 18

(vacana) and shining; to be
beautiful (sobh) || hablar,
decir y brillar; belleza;
esplendor.
bhassa bhassane = talking; III ......

conversing || hablar; 239
conversar.
bh dittiya = shining || brillar. I 125 bh dptau II 42
bhja dittiya = shining || brillar. I 45 bhrj u dptau I 194

bhrj dptau I 875
bhja puthakammani = separating VIII bhja pthakkarmai X 340

(puthakkaraa, visukriy) || 295
separar, dividir.
bhja106 bhjana-dnesu = dividing; VIII bhaj a virane? X 194

distributing and giving || 296
dividir; distribuir y dar.
bhma kodhe = to be angry || enojo, I 132 bhm a krodhe I 468

odio, ira.
bhma kodhe = to be angry || enojo, VIII bhma krodhe X 320

odio, ira. 334
bhsa byattya vcya = I 179 bh a vyakty vci I 643

articulado.
106
bhaja (Smith).
113
114
bhsu dittiya = shining (virjanat) I 181 bh dptau I 655

and manifesting (pkaat) ||
brillar y manifestacin (ser
claro o evidente).
bhikkha ycane = begging || pedir; I 24 bhik a bhikym albhe I 637

mendigar. lbhe ca
bhidi bhijjane = breaking itself || III ......

romperse. 226
bhidhi vidrae = splitting; rending || II bhid ir vidrae VII 2

hendir, partir; rajar; rasgar. 214
bhisi bhaye = fearing || temer. I 183 bhyas a bhaye (bhe -C.) I 659
bh bhaye = fearing || temer. I 125 i bh bhaye III 2
bhuja koille = crookedness || I 48 bhuj o kauilye VI 124

torcido.
bhuja plan-abyavaharaesu = II bhuj a planbhyavahrayo VII 17

protecting (rakkhaa) and 213
swallowing (ajjhoharaa) ||
proteger, cuidar y tragar,
ingerir.
bhui bharae = supporting; bearing I 58 hu i varae (bharae-C.) I 296

|| apoyar; soportar; mantener;
sostener; cargar.
bh sattya = being; existing || I 202 bh sattym I1

ser; existir; estar.
114
115
bh pattiya = reaching; attaining VIII bh prptvtmanepad X 300

(ppana) || alcanzar; realizar; 328
llegar, arribar.
bh avakampane = shaking || VIII bhuv a avakalkane X 207

vibrar; sacudir; agitar. 330
bha bhsya = speaking || VIII bhr a ym X 151

hablar. 302 viakayo X 157
(DP)
bhsa alakre = decorating; I 173 bh a alakre I 712

ornamenting || ornamentar;
decorar; adornar.
bhsa alakre = decorating; VIII bh a alakre X 190

ornamenting || ornamentar; 347
decorar; adornar.
bheja dittiya = shining || brillar. I 45 bhrej dptau I 193
bhesu calane = trembling || temblar; I 184 bhre calane ca (K)

sacudir; vibrar.
maki maane = adorning; I 16 mak i maane I 89

decorating (bhsana) ||
ornamentar; decorar; adornar.
makkha makkhane = smearing; VIII mrak a mlecchane? X 120

anointing || untar; manchar; 284
ungir.
makkha sakhate = making || hacer, I 22 mk a saghte = striking I 694

construir, crear. (mraka)
115
116
makha gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 makh a gatyartha I 136
makhi kakhya = doubting || I 22 mk i kkym I 700

dudar.
maga anvesane = seeking; searching VIII mga anveae X 352

|| buscar. 286
magi gamane = going || ir. I 27 mag i gatyartha I 157
magga gavesane = seeking; searching VIII mrg a anveae X 302

|| buscar. 286
maghi ketave gatyakkhepe ca = I 29 magh i gatykepe kaitave I 112

cheating; deceiving and ca
jumping up || engaar y saltar,
brincar.
maca kakkane = rubbing the body; I 33 mac a kalkane I 184

massaging (sarre
ubbaana) || frotar o dar
masajes en el cuerpo.
maci dhra-ucchya-pjanesu = I 33 mac i dhraocchrya- I 186

holding; bearing; removing pjaneu
impurities (malaharaa) and
venerating; honoring ||
sostener; soportar; mantener;
cargar; eliminar impurezas y
venerar, honrar.
majja sasuddhiya = purity || I 47 mj u uddhau II 57

pureza; purificacin. masj o VI 122
116
117
majja soceyylakresu = purity and VIII mj u auclakrayo X 304

decorating; ornamenting || 295
purificacin, pureza y
decorar; ornamentar.
macu gatiya = going || ir. I 30 mruc u gatyartha I 208

mluc u gatyartha I 209
mruc u gatyartha I 210
mluc u gatyartha (C. 1-49) I 211
maha nivse = living || residir, vivir. I 56 mah a mada-nivsayo I 355
maha soke = grieving; sorrowing || I 57 mah i oke I 282

mai vehane = wrapping; I 58 ma i va i vibhjane I 291

enveloping || envolver; cubrir. ma i veane (C.)
mai majjane = rubbing || frotar. I 58 mu i mrjane (majjane- I 294

K)
mai bhsya hasane ca = VIII ma i bhy hare ca X 54

ornamenting; decorating and 299 (DP)
laughing || ornamentar;
decorar y rer; sonrer.
maa sadde = making sound || I 59 ma a abdrtha I 475

producir sonido.
maa cge = giving up; abandoning I 62 ......

mattha viloane = stirring || revolver; I 71 ......

menear; batir.
117
118
matha vilothane = hurting || daar; I 74 math e viloane I 901

lastimar; herir.
mada ummde = delusion III mad hare? IV 99

(muyhana); absence of 227
mindfulness; forgetfulness
(sativippavsa); madness
(cittavikkhepa) || ignorancia;
engao; ilusin; falta de
atencin; olvido; locura.
mada vittiyoge = happiness || VIII mad a tptiyoge X 165

felicidad. 312
madi thuti-moda-mada-supana- I 92 mad i stuti-moda-mada- I 13

gatsu = praising; rejoicing; svapna-knti-gatiu (DP)
intoxicating, pride; sleeping
and going || elogiar, alabar;
regocijar; intoxicar, orgullo;
dormir e ir.
madda maddane = crushing || I 95 mrad a mardane I 804

aplastar; triturar. md u mardane C.
madhu unde = wetting; moistening || I 110 mdh u undane (unde-K) I 923

mojar; humedecer.
mana abbhse = repetition; practice; I 113 mn abhyse I 976

excesive desire || repeticin;
prctica; deseo excesivo.
mana e = knowing || conocer; III man a jne IV 67

comprender. 232
118
119
mana thambhe = rigidity of mind VIII mn a stambhe X 169

(cittassa thaddhat) || rigidez 321
de la mente.
manu bodhane = knowing || VII man u avabodhane VIII 9

conocer; comprender. 263
manta guttabhsane = protected VIII matr i guptaparibhae X 146

speaking; confidential 308 (DP)
speaking || lenguaje
confidencial; consultar.
mantha viloane = stirring || revolver; I 71 manth a viloane I 43

menear; batir.
mabba gatiya = going || ir. I 123 marb a gatau I 446
mabbha gatiya = going || ir. I 125 mabhr a gatyrtha I 590
maya gatiya = going || ir. I 139 may a gatau I 506
mara pacge = abandonment of I 157 m pratyge VI 110

life; dying || abandono de la
vida; morir.
marisa titikkhya = enduring; VIII m a titikym X 305

forgiving || soportar, aguantar; 348
tolerar; perdonar.
marisu secane sahane ca = sprinkling I 174 m u secane sahane ca I 739

and enduring || rociar,
asperjar; vertir y soportar,
aguantar; tolerar.
119
120
mala dhrae = holding; bearing || I 166 mal a dhrae I 522

malla dhrae = holding; bearing || I 166 mall a dhrae I 523

masa hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 ma a hisrtha I 723

lastimar; herir.
masa sadde rose ca = making sound I 176 ma a abde roakte ca I 725

and anger || producir sonido y (DP)
enojo; ira.
masa masane = touching; rubbing I 189 m a marae VI 131

|| tocar; frotar.
masa appbhve khamya ca = III m a titikym IV 55

smallness; littleness and 239
tolerance; patience ||
pequeez; poquedad y
paciencia; tolerancia.
masa107 pahsane = laughing || rer; VIII dh a prasahane X 306

sonrer. 348 prahasane X 318
(DP)
maha pjya = venerating; I 196 mah a pjym I 766

maha vuddhiya = increasing; I 196 mah i vddhau I 665

107
dhasa (Smith).
120
121
maha pjya = venerating; VIII maha pjym X 321

m mne sadde ca = honoring; I 130 m m mne II 53

liking and making sound || II 6
venerar, honrar; agradar y
producir sonido.
m parime = measuring || V ......

medir. 253
m parime = measuring || VII

medir. 265
mna vmasya = investigating || I 113 mn a pjym I 1021

investigar.
mna pjya pemane VIII mn a pjym X 299

vmasya = venerating; 321
honoring; loving and
investigating || venerar,
honrar; amar, querer e
investigar.
mpa mpane = building; VIII ......

constructing || construir, 327
edificar.
mhu108 mne = honoring; liking || I 197 mh mne I 943

venerar, honrar y agradar.
108
mh (Smith).
121
122
mi pakkhepane = putting into; IV u mi prakepae V4

throwing into || poner en/ 245
dentro de; arrojar en/dentro
de.
mia hisya = hurting || daar; I 61 m a hisym VI 41

lastimar; herir.
mida snehe = sticking I 94 i mid snehane I 779

(vassakhto sneho); liking
(ptisneho) || aglutinar, pegar;
agradar.
mida medh-hissu = wisdom and I 97 mid medh-hisanayo I 920

hurting || sabidura y daar;
lastimar; herir.
mida sinehane = sticking || III i mid snehane IV 133

mida sinehane = joy (pti) || alegra; VIII mid a snehane X8

regocijo. 312
mima109 gatimhi = going || ir. I 132 mm gatau I 496
mila sinehane = sticking || I 169 mil a leae VI 71

aglutinar, pegar.
mile gattavinme = bending the I 166 mlai harakaye I 953

body or limbs || doblar el (gtravinme-K)
109
mma (Smith).
122
123
milecha aviyattya vcya = I 39 mlech a avyakte abde I 220

inarticulate speech || lenguaje
inarticulado.
milecha abyattya vcya = VIII mlech a avyakty vci X 121

inarticulate speech || lenguaje 294
inarticulado.
mileu ummde = madness || locura. I 52 mre unmde (mre -K) I 313
milevu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 171 mlev secane I 535

miva110 thliye = thickness; bigness || I 170 mv a sthaulye I 596

misa sadde rose ca = making sound I 176 mi a abde roakte ca I 725

and anger || producir sonido y (DP)
enojo; ira.
misa sajjane = clinging; VIII ......

attachment; making; 348
preparing || apego, adhesin;
hacer; preparar.
misu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 174 mi u secane I 730

missa sammisse = mixing || mezclar. VIII mira saparke X 375

348
miha secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 195 mih a secane I 1041

110
mva (Smith).
123
124
m hisya = hurting || daar; V m hisym IX 4

mla nimelane = closing the eyes || I 162 ml a nimeae I 550

cerrar los ojos; parpadear.
mla nimlane = winking; blinking VIII ......

|| parpadear; cerrar los ojos. 342
muca mocane = setting free; II muc mokae VI 136

releasing || libertar, liberar, 213
poner en libertad, soltar.
muca mokkhe = to get released; to III ......

get freed || ser liberado. 223
muci kakkane = rubbing the body I 33 muc i kalkane I 185

(sarre ubbaana) || frotar o
dar masajes en el cuerpo.
muccha moha-mucchsu = delusion I 39 murch moha- I 227

and fainting || ignorancia; samucchryayo
engao; ilusin y desmayo;
desvanecimiento.
muji saddatthe = making sound || I 44 muj a abdrtha I 269

producir sonido. muj i abdrtha I 270
mujja osdane = sinking || hundir; I 49 ......

sumergir.
mua pamaddane = crushing; I 54 mu a mardane, mua iti I 324

overcoming || aplastar; Durga (DP)
triturar; superar; vencer.
124
125
mua aggisadda-pakkhepa- I 54 mu a kepa-mardanayo VI 94

maddanesu = sound of fire; (DP)
putting in, throwing in and
crushing || sonido del fuego;
poner en/dentro de, arrojar
en/dentro de y aplastar,
triturar.
mua sacuane = grinding; VIII mu a sacrane X 73

crushing || moler; aplastar; 296
triturar.
mui kaane (khaane) = cutting I 58 mu i khaane I 348

|| cortar.
mua paie = promising; I 61 mu a pratijne VI 44

acknowledging; admitting ||
prometer; reconocer; admitir.
mutta pasavane = flowing; passing VIII mtra prasravae X 361

urine || fluir, correr; orinar. 309
muttha saghte = accumulating; VIII must a saghte X 88

agregar.
muda hse111 = laughing (hasana); I 92 mud a hare I 16

liking; satisfaction (tuhi) ||
rer; sonrer; agradar;
satisfacer; satisfaccin.
111
hasse (Smith).
125
126
muda sasagge = uniting (ekatoka- VIII mud a sasarge X 200

raa) || unir (lit. hacer uno). 313
muna gatiya = going || ir. I 117 un a gatau? VI 46
muna e = knowing || conocer; V ......

comprender. 251
mubbi112 bandhane = binding || ligar; I 124 murv bandhane I 606

atar.
mura savehane = surrounding; I 156 mur a saveane VI 53

wrapping; enveloping ||
envolver; cubrir; circundar.
musa theyye = stealing (thenana, I 173 m a113 steye I 707

corik) || robar; hurtar.
musa theyye = stealing || robar; V mu a steye IX 58

hurtar. 256
muha vecitte = mental confusion || III muh a vaicittye IV 89

confusin. 240
mua sukhane = happiness || I 201 m a sukhane VI 38

felicidad.
m bandhane = binding || ligar; I 130 m bandhane I 1016

atar.
m bandhane = binding || ligar; V ......

atar. 254
112
mubb (Smith).
113
mu a (K).
126
127
mla patihya = supporting; I 164 ml a pratihym I 562

footing || apoyar; soportar;
mantener; sostener; base;
fundamento.
mla rohane = rising; growing || VIII ml a rohae X 63

levantar(se), subir; crecer. 342
mla lavana-pavanesu = cutting VIII palyl a lavana-pavanayo X 267

(chedana) and cleansing; 344 (K.)
cleaning (sodhana) || cortar y
limpiar; purificar.
me paidna-dnesu = I 130 me praidne I 1010

restitution, restoration and
taking; seizing || restitucin,
devolucin y tomar, asir.
meu ummde = madness || locura. I 52 mle unmde (mre -K) I 312
meda medh-hissu = wisdom and I 97 med medh-hisanayo I 920

hurting || sabidura y daar;
lastimar; herir.
medha hisya sagame ca = I 109 medh medh-hisanayo I 920

hurting and meeting; sagame ca (not in I 895
associating || daar; lastimar; Katre) (DP)
herir y reunin; asociacin.
mevu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 171 mev secane I 534

127
128
mokkha muccane = being freed || estar I 21 ......

libre, ser liberado.
mokkha sane114 = sitting || sentar(se), VIII mok a asane K.

estar sentado. 285 10.176
mhi sahasane = laughing a little; I 190 mi addhasane I 996

smiling || sonrer.
yakkha pjya = venerating; VIII yak a pjy X 153

yaja devapja-sagatakaraa-dna- I 47 yaj a devapj- I 1051

dhammesu = venerating; sagatikaraa-
honoring the Buddha, etc. dneu
(Buddhdipj); connecting
(samodhnakaraa);
renunciating (pariccga) and
spiritual practices
(jhnasldi) || venerar,
honrar; honrar al Buddha,
etc.; unir, conectar; renunciar
y prctica de moralidad (sla),
concentracin de absorcin
(jhna), etc.
yata patiyatane = making effort I 65 yat prayatne I 30

(vymakaraa) || esforzar(se)
(lit. hacer esfuerzo).
114
asane (Smith).
128
129
yata nikropakresu = striking and VIII yat a nikropaskrayo X 196

helping; supporting || 309
esforzar(se) y ayudar; apoyar.
yanta sakocane = contracting; VIII yatr i sakocane sakoce X3

shrinking || contraer (reducir); 308 X3
encoger; torcer; deformar. (DP)
yapa ypane = continued existence VIII ......

(pavattana) || existencia 327
continua (ininterrumpida).
yabha methune = coupling; sexual I 126 yabh a maithune (viparta- I 1005

intercourse (mithunassa jana- maithune-K. 152; (DP)
dvayassa ida kamma) || Katre I 1029)
cpula, unin sexual.
yama parivesane = attending; I 133 yam a apariveae I 871

feeding || asistir, servir;
alimentar, dar de comer.
yama aparivesane = avoiding; not VIII yam a ca pariveae X 82

moving around || evitar; no 332
moverse alrededor.
yamu uparame = restraining; I 132 yam a uparame I 1033

abstaining (viramana) ||
controlar; restringir; contener;
abstenerse.
yasu payatane = striving || III yas u prayatane IV 101

esforzar(se). 239
129
130
y gati-ppuesu = going and I 137 y prpae II 40

reaching || ir y alcanzar;
realizar; llegar, arribar.
y gati-ppuesu = going and III ......

reaching || ir y alcanzar; 237
yca ycanya = begging || pedir; I 34 u yc ycym I 916

mendigar.
yu missane gatiya ca = mixing I 138 yu mirae (also Ks.) II 23 II

and going || mezclar e ir. mirae mirae ca 23
(DP)
yu jigucchya = disliking; VIII yu jugupsym X 170

loathing || disgustar; 334
desagradar; detestar.
yugi vajjane = avoiding || evitar; I 28 yug i varjane I 167

abstenerse de.
yucha pamde = neglecting || I 39 yucch a pramde I 214

desatender, descuidar. yuch a pramde (I 229 Katre) (DP)
(Ks.
42)
yuja yoge = connecting || conectar; II yuj ir yoge VII 7

ligar; unir. 213
yuja samdhimhi = putting III yuj a samdhau IV 68

together; concentration 224
(samdhna) || unificacin de
la mente; concentracin.
130
131
yuja sayamane = restraining; VIII yuj a sayamane X 264

abstaining || controlar; 295
restringir; contener;
abstenerse.
yua sasagge = uniting || unir. VIII pua sasarge X 365

297
yuta bhsane = saying; speaking I 66 yut bhsane I 31

(udraa) || hablar; decir;
pronunciar.
yudha sampahre = striking; fighting I 110 yudh a saprahre C.

|| golpear; pegar; luchar; 1-585
pelear.
yudha sampahre = striking; fighting III yudh a samprahre IV 64

|| golpear; pegar; luchar; 231
pelear.
ysa hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 y a hisrtha I 711

lastimar; herir.
yesu payatane = striving || I 181 pe ye prayatne I 616

esforzar(se). (DP)
I 646
(K. 89)
you sambandhe = connecting || I 52 yau bandhe (sambandhe- I 311

conectar; ligar. K)
rakkha plane = protecting || proteger; I 22 rak a plane I 688

cuidar.
131
132
rakha gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 rakh a gatyartha I 140
rakhi gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 rakh i gatyartha I 141
ragi gamane = going || ir. I 27 rag i gatyartha I 153
ragi115 sakya = doubting || dudar. I 28 rag e akym I 822
raghi gatyakkhepe = jumping up; I 29 ragh i gatyartha I 107

going up (gatiy akkhepo) ||
saltar, brincar, ir hacia arriba.
raca patiyatane = striving || VIII raca pratiyatne X 318

esforzar(se). 292
raji vijjhane = piercing || perforar; I 48 ......

atravesar; penetrar.
raha paribhsane = abusing; I 56 rah a paribhae I 357

censurar.
raa sadde = making sound || I 59 ra a abdrtha I 472

producir sonido.
raa gatiya = going || ir. I 61 ra a gatau I 832
rada vilekhane = scratching || I 84 rad a vilekhane I 54

rayar; escribir.
radha hisy = hurting III radh a his-sarddhyo IV 84

231
115
raga (Smith).
132
133
ranja rge = coloring; dyeing; liking I 45 raj a rge I 865,

|| color(e)ar, teir; agradar. 1048
ranja rge = coloring; dyeing; liking III raj a rge IV 58

|| color(e)ar, teir; agradar. 224
randha pke = cooking || cocinar; VIII ......

cocer. 319
rabha rbhasse = acting in excess I 128 rabh a rbhasye I 1023

(kara-uttariy) || actuar en
exceso.
raya gatiya = going || ir. I 139 ray a gatau I 511
ramu kya = playing; sporting || I 134 ram a krym I 906

jugar.
rasa sadde = making sound || I 175 ras a abde I 745

producir sonido.
rasa assdane = tasting || gustar, I 175 ......

saborear.
rasa assda-sinehesu = tasting and I 175 rasa svdana- X 385

sticking || gustar, saborear y snehanayo
aglutinar, pegar.
rasa hniya = decrease; loss || I 175 ......

prdida; disminucin;
reduccin.
rasa assdane = tasting; enjoying || VIII rasa svdana- X 385

gustar, saborear; disfrutar; 348 snehanayo
gozar de.
133
134
rasa sinehane = sticking || VIII rasa svdana- X 385

aglutinar, pegar. 348 snehanayo
raha cge = giving up; abandoning I 195 rah a tyge I 767

raha cge = giving up; abandoning VIII raha tyge X 84

|| dejar; abandonar; renunciar. 349 X 312
rahada abyattasadde = inarticulate I 94 hrd a avyakte abde I 26

rahi gatiya = going || ir. I 195 rah i gatau I 768
r dne = taking; seizing || I 145, r l dne dne (r, l II 48 II

tomar; asir, agarrar. 209 dne-C. 2.19) 49
rkha sosanlamatthesu = making I 21 rkh oalamarthayo I 126

rgha smatthiye = ability || I 29 rgh smarthye, drgh I 113,

habilidad; capacidad. yme ca (yse ca, 117
Ks)
rja dittiya = shining || brillar. I 45 rj dptau I 874
rdha sasiddhiya = succeeding; III rdh a sasiddhau V 16

accomplishing || tener xito; 231
lograr; conseguir; consumar;
realizar.
134
135
rdha sasiddhiya = succeeding; IV rdh a sasiddhau V 16

realizar.
rsu sadde = making sound || I 182 rs abde I 657

producir sonido.
ri santne = expanding; I 145 ......

continuing || continuar,
continuidad; expandir.
ri vasane = living || residir, III r ravae (sravae-C., IV 30

habitar, vivir. 238 K)
ri116 gati-desanesu = going and V r gati-reaayo IX 30

preaching || ir y predicar; 254
instruir.
rikhi117 gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 kh i gatyartha I 146
rigi gamane = going || ir. I 27 rig i gatyartha I 164
rica virecane = purging || purgar. II ric ir virecane VII 4

213
rica viyojana-sampajjanesu118 = VIII ric a viyojana- X 273

separating and succeeding || 293 samparcanayo
separar y tener xito; lograr.
116
r (Smith).
117
rikhi sarpae (Kappadduma).
118
viyojana-sampaccanesu (Smith).
135
136
risa hisya = hurting || daar; I 189 ri a hisym VI 126

lastimar; herir.
risa gatiya = going || ir. I 189 li a gatau VI 7

VI 127
ru gatiya rosane ca = going I 145 ru gati-reaayo I 1008

and anger || ir y enojo; odio;
ira.
ru sadde = making sound || I 145, ru abde II 24

ru upatpe = vexation; IV u du upatpe V 10

tormenting || molestar; 245
rukkha varae = restraining I 23 ......

rukkha phrusse = roughness; VIII rka pruye X 362

harshness (pharusabhva) || 285
dureza, aspereza.
ruca dittiya rocane ca = shining; I 34, ruc a dptv abhiprtau ca I 781

splendor, beauty (sobh) and 210
liking (ruci) || brillar;
esplendor, belleza, hermosura
y agradar, gustar.
ruca rocane = liking (ruci) || III ruc a dptvabhiprtau ca I 781

agradar, deleitar. 222
136
137
ruja bhage = breaking up; I 48 ruj o bhage VI 123

dissolution || disolucin;
cesacin.
ruja hisya = hurting || daar; VIII ruj a hisym X 262

rua paighte = striking || golpear; I 54 ru a pratighte I 783

pegar; chocar.
rui theyye = stealing || robar; I 54 lu i vikasane steye; lui I 350

hurtar. luh i ity Eke I 328
(DP)
ruha upaghte = hurting; injuring || I 56 ruh a upaghte I 359

ruhi gatiya = going || ir. I 57 ruh i gatau I 368
ruda assuvimocane = releasing I 103 rud ir aruvimocane II 58

tears, crying || soltar lgrimas,
llorar.
rudhi varae = shutting, closing II rudh ir varae VII 1

(pidahana); preventing; 212
obstructing (parirundhana);
hindering (palibuddhana); not
to allow to take away (haritu
appadna) || cerrar; cubrir;
prevenir, obstruir; impedir,
obstaculizar; no permitir que
sea llevado; evitar.
137
138
rudhi varae = see above || ver el III ......

arriba. 232
rubhi nivrae = preventing; I 129 ......

warding off || prevenir; evitar;
impedir.
rusa hisya = hurting || daar; I 189 ru a hisym VI 126

lastimar; herir.
rusa rosane = making angry VIII ru a roe X 132

(kopakaraa) || enojar; irritar. 346
ruha cammani ptubhve = I 197 ruh a bjajanmani I 912

manifestation of the skin || prdurbhve ca
manifestacin de la piel,
corteza, cuero, etc.
rpa ruppane = changing III ......

(kuppana); striking (ghaana); 233
oppressing (pana) || cambiar;
golpear; oprimir, subyugar,
someter.
rpa rpakriyya = making VIII rpa rpakriyym X 387

manifest (paksanakriy) || 323
hacer manifiesto.
re sadde = making sound || I 145, rai abde I 958

reka sakya = doubting || dudar. I 16 rek akym I 80
rosa bhaye = fearing || temer. I 184 bhe bhaye I 932
138
139
roa andare = disrespect || falta de I 200 rau andare I 377

respeto.
laka assdane = tasting; enjoying || VIII lag a svdane X 197

gozar de.
lakkha dassan-akesu = seeing VIII lak a darankanayo X5

(passana) and marking 283
(lajana) || ver y marcar.
lakkha locane = seeing; perceiving || VIII lak a locane X 157

ver; percibir. 285
lakha gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 lakh a gatyartha I 142
lakhi gatyatthe = going || ir. I 22 lakh i gatyartha I 143
laga sage sakya = attachment; I 28 lag e sage I 823

clinging and doubting ||
apego, adhesin y dudar.
lagi gamane = going || ir. I 27 lag i gatyartha I 154
laghi gatyakkhepe = jumping up; I 29 lagh i gatyartha I 108

going up (gatiy akkhepo) ||
saltar, brincar, ir hacia arriba.
laghi bhsane = saying; speaking || VIII lagh i bhrtha X 220

hablar; decir; pronunciar. 290 X 254
lagha gatyatthe = going || ir. I 208 lagh i gatyartha I 108
lagha laghane = jumping; hopping VIII ......

|| saltar, brincar. 290
139
140
laja bhassane = talking; I 44 laj a bharjane I 238

conversing || hablar; laj i bharjane (DP) I
conversar. 239
(DP)
laja paksane = showing || mostar; VIII laja prakane, X 374

indicar; exponer. 295 laji ity Eke
laji dittiya bhassane ca = shining I 44 laj i bhsrtha K.

and talking; conversing || 304
brillar y hablar; conversar.
lajja lajjane = becoming shameful; I 49 o laj vre (vrane) VI 10

being ashamed || estar
avergonzado.
laa blye paribhsane ca = I 52 la a blye I 320

childhood and abusing;
blaming; censuring || niez;
infancia y denostar;
reprochar; criticar; censurar.
lai jivhmathane = moving the I 59 lai jivhonmathane I 852

tongue || mover la lengua.
lai ukkhepe = throwing upwards VIII o la i utkepae X9

|| tirar o arrojar hacia arriba. 298
lapa viyattiya vcya = VIII hlap a vyaktym vci X 116

articulate speech || lenguaje 323
articulado.
labi avasasane = hanging down I 124 lab i avasrasane I 404

(avalambana) || colgar.
140
141
labha lbhe = gaining; acquiring || I 129 u labh a prptau I 1024

obtener; adquirir; ganar.
labha bhaane = defining; VIII bhal a bhaane X 161

determining || definir; 330
determinar.
lala icchya = wishing; desiring VIII lal a psym X 148

|| desear. 343
lasa silesana-kanesu = adhering I 175 las a leaa-kranayo I 746

and playing; sporting ||
adherir, pegar y jugar;
recrear(se).
lasa kantiya = wishing; desiring I 184 la a kntau I 937

|| desear; anhelar.
lasa silyayoge119 = dancing VIII las a ilpayoge X 189

(lsiya); playing a drama 346
(nakanana) || danzar;
representar un drama.
laa vilse = charm; grace; I 200 la a vilse; lal a ity Eke I 359
dallying || encanto; gracia; lal a psym (DP)
belleza; coquetera, coquetear. I 382
laa upasevya = serving || VIII la a upasevym X7

servir; asistir. 350
l dne = taking; seizing || I 159, l dne II 49

tomar; asir, agarrar. 209
119
Corrupt reading for sippayoge = engaging in arts.
141
142
lkha sosanlamatthesu = making I 21 lkh oalamarthayo I 127

lgha smatthiye = ability || I 29 lgh smarthye I 114

lja bhassane = talking; I 44 lj a bhartsane I 259

conversing || hablar; lj i bhartsane I 260
conversar.
lbha pesane = sending || enviar; VIII lbha prerae X 389

mandar. 330
likha lekhane = writing || escribir. I 23 likh a akaravinyse VI 72

(lekhane-C.)
ligi gamane = going || ir. I 27 lig i gatyartha I 165
liga cittkarae = making VIII lig i citrkarae X 199

variegated 285
(vicitrabhvakaraa) ||
abigarrar; diferenciar.
lipa limpane = smearing; staining II lip a upadehe VI 139

|| untar; ensuciar; manchar. 216
lipi upalepe = smearing; staining || I 121 lip a upadehe VI 139

untar; ensuciar; manchar.
liha assdane = tasting || gustar, I 198 lih a svdane II 6

saborear.
142
143
l silese = adhering; sticking || V l leae IX 31

adherir; pegar. 254
lsa120 appbhve = smallness; III li a alpbhve IV 70

poquedad.
luja vinse = destruction; ruin; III ......

loss || destruccin; prdida; 225
ruina.
luji bhsya = speaking || VIII luj i bhrtha X 218

hablar. 295
luca apanayane = removing || I 30 luc a apanayane I 202

lugar).
lua vilohane121 = hurting || herir; I 53 lu a viloane I 336

lastimar; matar.
lua paighte = striking || golpear; I 54 lu a pratighte I 784

pegar; chocar.
lua bhsya = speaking || VIII lu a bhrtha X 214

hablar. 297
lui theyye = stealing || robar; I 54 luh i steye I 350

hurtar. lu i ity eke I 328
(DP)
120
lisa (Smith).
121
viloane (Smith).
143
144
lui theyye = stealing || robar; VIII luh a steye X 27

hurtar. 297
luha upaghte = hurting; injuring || I 56 luh a upaghte I 360

luha paighte = striking || golpear; I 57 luh a pratighte I 785

pegar; chocar.
luha sakilese = defiling; I 57 lu a saleae? VI 87

inflicting || ensuciar; manchar;
contaminar; infligir.
luhi lasiye gatipaighte ca = I 56 luh i lasye pratighte ca I 366

laziness and obstructing the
going (the action) || pereza;
flojedad; inactividad y
obstruir la accin de ir; cojear;
renquear.
luhi gatiya = going || ir. I 57 luh i gatau I 369
luthi his-sakilesesu = hurting I 71 luth i his-sakleanayo I 46

and defiling; inflicting ||
daar; lastimar; herir y
ensuciar; manchar;
contaminar; infligir.
lupa acchedane = cutting || cortar. II lup chedane VI 137

216
lupa adassane = not seeing; III lup chedane VI 137

ausencia; no ver.
144
145
lubi addane = wetness; moistness || I 123 lub i ardane I 454

humedad.
lubi addane = inflicting; VIII lub i adarane, ardane ity X 114

tormenting; hurting (his) || 328 eke
infligir; atormentar; daar;
lastimar; herir.
lubha vimohane = delusion || I 129 lubh a vimohane VI 22

ignorancia; engao; ilusin.
lubha giddhiya = greed; III lubh a grddhye IV 128

attachment || codicia, deseo; 235
apego.
l chedane = cutting || cortar. V l chedane IX 13

255
lsa hisya = hurting || daar; VIII l a hisym X 70

loka dassane = seeing || ver. I 15 lok darane I 76
loka dassane = seeing || ver. VIII ......

278
loka bhsya = speaking || VIII lok bhrtha X 236

hablar. 283
loca dassane = seeing || ver. I 33 loc darane I 177
loca dassane = seeing || ver. VIII ......

291
145
146
loca bhsya = speaking || VIII loc bhrtha X 237

hablar. 292
loa ummde = madness || locura. I 200 lo unmde I 379
vaka dne = taking; seizing || I 16 vk a dne I 92

vaka dittiya paighte ca = I 16 cak a tptau pratighte ca I 93

shining and striking || brillar y
golpear; pegar; chocar.
vaki gatyatthe = going || ir. I 17 vak i gatyartha I 95
vakka bhsane = saying; speaking || VIII valk a paribhae X 35

hablar; decir; pronunciar. 282
vakka122 nsane = destroying || VIII dhakk a nane X 55

vakkha varae = restraining I 23 vk a varae I 635

vakhi kakhya = doubting || I 22 vk i kkym I 699

dudar.
vagi gamane = going || ir. I 27 vag i gatyartha I 156
vagga gatiya = going || ir. I 27 valg a gatyartha I 152
122
dhakka (Smith).
146
147
vaka koille = crookedness || I 12 vak i kauilye I 88

torcido.
vaca viyattiya vcya = I 31 vac a paribhae II 54

articulate speech || lenguaje (bhane-K)
articulado.
vaca dittiya = shining || brillar. I 33 ......
vaca bhsane = speaking; saying || VIII vac a paribhae X 298

vaci dittiya = shining || brillar. I 33 ......
vacchu chedane = cutting || cortar. I 40 o vrac u chedane VI 11
vachi icchya = wishing; desiring; I 39 vch i icchym I 223

longing || desear.
vaja123 gatiya = going || ir. I 42 vaj a gatau I 271

vraj a gatau I 234
vaja maggana-sakhresu = VIII vraj a mrga-saskra- X 75

searching and forming; 295 gatyo
making || buscar y formar;
hacer.
vajja vajjane = avoiding || evitar; VIII vj varjane X 271

abstenerse de. 294
vacu gatiya = going || ir. I 30 vac u gatyartha I 204
123
vaju (Smith).
147
148
vacu palambhane = deceiving; VIII vanc u pralambhane X 163

cheating (upalpana) || 292
engaar; defraudar.
vaa vedhane124 = piercing || I 52 va a veane I 322

perforar; atravesar; penetrar.
vaa ganthe = tying; making a knot VIII vaa granthe X 311

|| atar; amarrar; hacer un nudo. 297
vaa vibhajane = dividing; VIII vaa vibhjane X 372

separating || dividir; separar. 297 va i ity Eke
vai vibhjane = dividing || dividir; I 54 va i vibhjane (C.1.110. X 48

separar. K. 1.224)
vaha thliye = thickness; bigness || I 56 vah a sthaulye I 354

vahi ekacariyya = faring alone || I 57 vah i ekacaryym I 281

andar solo.
vai vehane = wrapping; I 58 va i vibhjane I 290

vaha vahane = growing; I 59 ......

increasing || crecer; aumentar.
vaha kirae = scattering; pouring || VIII ......

esparcir, diseminar, 299
desparramar, dispersar; vertir;
rociar.
124
vehane (Smith).
148
149
vaa sadde = making sound || I 59 va a abdrtha I 473

producir sonido. vra a abdrtha I 478
vaa gattavicuane = injuring the VIII vraa gtravicrane X 390

body || lastimar, daar el 304
cuerpo.
vaa vaa-kriy-vitthra-gua- VIII vara vara-kriy-vistra- X 391

vacanesu = praising 299 gua-vacaneu
(pasas), doing (karaa),
extending (vitthinnat),
quality of morality, etc.
(sldidhamma) and speaking
(vc) || elogiar, alabar; hacer;
extender, expandir; cualidad
de la moralidad, etc. y hablar.
vata ycane = begging || pedir; I 67 cat e ycane I 918

mendigar. cad e ycane I 918
vatu vattane = being; existing || ser; I 67 vt u vartane I 795

existir.
vatu bhsya = speaking || VIII vt u bhrtha X 241

hablar. 309
vattha addane = inflicting; VIII bast a ardane X 144

tormenting || infligir; 311
atormentar.
vada viyattiya vcya = I 97 vad a vyakty vci I 1058

articulado.
149
150
vada bhsya = speaking || VIII vad a sadesavacane X 297

hablar. 314
vad abhivdana-thutsu = saluting VIII vad i abhivdane C.

and praising || saludar, 315 10.37
reverenciar y elogiar; alabar.
vaddha vaddhane = growing; I 109 vdh u vddhau I 796

increasing || crecer; aumentar,
incrementar.
vaddha chedana-praesu = cutting VIII vardh a chedana-praayo X 112

and fillling || cortar y llenar; 319
completar.
vaddha bhsya = speaking || VIII vdh u bhrtha X 242

hablar. 320
vadha sayame = restraining || VIII badh a sayamane X 14

controlar; restringir; contener. 319
vana sambhattiya = serving || I 113 van a sabhaktau I 491

servir.
vanda abhivdana-thutsu = saluting, I 91 vad i abhivdana-stutyo I 11

bowing down and praising ||
saludar, reverenciar y elogiar;
alabar.
vapa santne = expanding; I 120 cap a sntvane I 426

continuing || continuar,
continuidad; expandir.
150
151
vapa bjanikkhepe = sowing || I 121 u vap a bjasatne chedane I 1028

sembrar. pi (DP)
vappha gatiya = going || ir. I 122 parph a gatau (varpha-K) I 439
vabba gatiya = going || ir. I 123 barb a gatau I 445
vabbha gatiya = going || ir. I 125 vabhr a gatyrtha I 589
vabbha bhojane = eating || comer. I 127 valbh a bhojane I 418
vamu uggirae = vomiting; ejecting I 134 u vam a udgirae I 902

|| vomitar; expeler.
vambha viddhasane = demolishing; VIII ......

destroying || demoler; destruir. 330
vaya gatiya = going || ir. I 139 vay a gatau I 504
vara varae = restraining || I 154 v savarae I 959

controlar; restringir; contener. (DP)
vara icchya = wishing; desiring VIII vara psym X 308

|| desear; anhelar. 335
vara varae = covering || cubrir; VIII v varae X 270

obstruir. 336
varaha padhniye paribhsana- I 196 barh a prdhnye I 669

hisdnesu ca = striving; varh a prdhnye I 671
abusing; blaming; hurting and
taking; seizing || esforzar(se);
lastimar y tomar.
151
152
varaha hisya = hurting || daar; VIII barh a hisym X 123

vala calane savarae ca = I 166 val a savarae I 520

trembling and restraining; sacalae ca
protecting || temblar; vibrar y
proteger.
vala vilsane125 = to be graceful || I 169 cal a vilasane VI 64

encantar, embelesar, atraer,
cautivar.
vala bharae = bearing; supporting VIII cal a bhtau X 68

|| apoyar; soportar; mantener; 343
sostener; cargar.
valaha padhniye paribhsana- I 196 balh a prdhnye I 670

hisdnesu ca = striving; valh a paribhaa-his- I 672
abusing; blaming; hurting and cchdaneu (varh a
taking; seizing || esforzar(se); paribhaa-
denostar; criticar; culpar; hisdneu-K)
herir; lastimar; daar y tomar.
valla calane savarae ca = I 166 vall a savarae I 521

trembling and restraining; sacalae ca
proteger.
vasa hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 va a hisrtha I 722

lastimar; herir.
125
vilasane (Smith).
152
153
vasa sinehane = sticking || I 179 var a snehane I 644

aglutinar, pegar.
vasa nivse = living || residir, vivir. I 184 vas a nivse I 1054
vasa kantiya = wishing; desiring I 185 va a kntau II 70

|| desear; anhelar.
vasa sadde = making sound || III v abde IV 54

vasa sinehana-ched-vaharaesu = VIII vas a sneha-cchedpahara- X 204

sticking, cutting and stealing 347 esu
(corikya gahaa) ||
aglutinar, pegar; cortar y
robar, hurtar.
vasa acchdane = clothing; VIII ......

covering || cubrir; arropar, 349
vestir.
vassa secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 174 v u secane I 738

vassu sattibandhane = enabling VIII v a aktibandhane X 164

(samatthatkaraa) || hacer 346
capaz, posible; capacitar.
vaha vuddhiya = increasing; I 196 vah i vddhau I 634

growing || crecer; aumentar. (DP)
vaha ppue = reaching || alcanzar; I 197 vah a prpae I 1053

153
154
vaaji paribhoge = enjoying || I 49 ......

disfrutar; gozar de.
v gati-gandhanesu = going and I 170 v gati-gandhanayo II 41

spreading of odor || ir y
difusin del olor.
v gati-gandhanesu = going and III v gati-gandhanayo II 41

spreading of odor || ir y 238
difusin del olor.
vta gati-sukha-sevanesu = going, VIII va sukha-sevanayo X 336

happiness (sukhana) and 309 gati-sukha-sevanayor
associating; serving || ir; ity eke
felicidad y asociar; servir;
asistir.
vyama hya = exerting; striving || I 133 ......

esforzar(se).
vsa upasevya = serving || VIII vsa upasevym X 338

servir; asistir. 347
vsi alakre = decorating; I 173 tas i alakare K. 95
ornamenting || ornamentar; See also
decorar; adornar. X 190
vhu payatane = striving || I 196 bh prayatne I 676

esforzar(se).
va lape = conversing; speaking I 200 v plvye I 287

|| dirigir la palabra; hablar; b (DP)
conversar. I 306
154
155
viccha gatiya = going || ir. I 39 vic(c)h a gatau VI 129
viccha bhsya = speaking || VIII vic(c)h a bhrtha X 233

hablar. 294
vij bhaya-calanesu = fearing and I 48 o vij bhaya-calanayo VI 9

trembling; moving || temer y
temblar; sacudir; vibrar;
mover.
vij bhaya-calanesu = fearing and III o vij bhaya-calanayo VII 23

trembling; moving || temer y 224
temblar; sacudir; mover;
vibrar.
via sadde = making sound || I 53 bi a abde I 317

producir sonido. (DP)
vithu ycane = begging || pedir; I 73 vith ycane I 33

mendigar. veth ycane I 34
vida e = knowing (jnana) || I 103 vid a jne II 55

vida lbhe = gaining; acquiring || II vid lbhe VI 138

obtener; adquirir; ganar. 215
vida tuhiya = liking; II ......

satisfaction || agradar; 215
satisfacer.
vida sattya = being; existing III vid a sattym IV 62

(vijjamnkra) || ser; existir; 227
estar.
155
156
vida lbhe = gaining; acquiring || VIII ......

obtener; adquirir; ganar. 312
vida cehan126-khyna-nivsesu = VIII vid a cetan-khyna- X 168

marking (saa), talking 312 nivseu
(kathana) and living
(nivasana) || marcar, percibir;
hablar y residir, vivir.
vidi avayave = limb; part; I 89 bid i avayave I 65

componente.
vidi lbhe = gaining; acquiring || I 105 vid lbhe VI 138

obtener; adquirir; ganar.
vidha vijjhane = piercing || perforar; III vyadh a tane? IV 72

atravesar; penetrar. 231
vibha127 katthane = boasting || ostentar. I 126 cbh katthane (vbha, I 409

Durga)
vi-bhuja cutting || cortar. I 48 ......
viria128 lajjya codane ca = shame III vr a codane lajjy ca IV 18

and inciting; rousing || 241
vergenza e incitar, instigar;
provocar.
vil vilnabhve = dissolution || III l leae? IV 31

disolucin; destruccin. 238
126
cetan (Smith).
127
vbha (Smith).
128
vira (Smith).
156
157
visa pavesane = entering || entrar. I 189 vi a praveane VI 130
visa vippayoge = separation || V vi a viprayoge IX 54

separacin. 256
vi-sisa atisaye = abundance; excess || VIII vi-i a atiaye (K-

abundancia; exceso. 348 307)
visu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 174 vi u secane I 729

v pajana-kanti-asana-khdana- I 170 v gati-prajana-knty- II 38

gatsu = trembling (calana); asana-khdaneu (DP)
liking (abhiruci); eating
(bhattaparibhoga); chewing
(pvdibhakkhana) and going
(gamana) || temblar, vibrar;
agradar; comer (disfrutar la
comida); masticar e ir.
v tantasantne = weaving; V ......

sewing || tejer; entrelazar; 254
coser.
v hisya = hurting || daar; V ......

vra vikkantiya = exerting; VIII vra vikrntau X 355

striving (vikkamana) || 336
esforzar(se).
vu savarae = restraining; IV v savarae V8

protecting || controlar; 246 (DP)
157
158
vula nimmajjane = squeezing; VIII bul a nimajjane (K.

rubbing || apretar; comprimir; 342 285)
estrujar; frotar.
vusa pgabbiye129 = boldness; IV i dh prgalbhye V 22

impudence (kya-vc- 246
manehi pagabbabhvo) ||
audacia, osada, atrevimiento;
impudencia (con respecto a
las acciones del cuerpo,
lenguaje y mente).
ve tantasantne = weaving; I 170 ve tantusatne I 1055

sewing || tejer; entrelazar;
coser.
ve sosane = making dry || secar. I 170 o vai oae I 969
vekkha vekkhane = observing; I 22 ......

looking; investigating ||
observar; investigar;
considerar.
veha vehane = wrapping; I 57 ve a veane I 274

veu a-cint-nismanesu = I 61 ve gati-jna-cint- I 926

knowing; thinking and nimana-vditra-
listening, observing || conocer, grahaeu
comprender; pensar,
reflexionado y escuchar, oir,
observar.
129
pgabbhiye (Smith).
158
159
vela klopadese = indicating the VIII vela klopadee X 334

time || indicar el tiempo ( = 344
hora o momento).
velu gatiya = going || ir. I 165 vel calane I 568
vesu dne = giving || dar. I 190 ......
vehu payatane = striving || I 196 veh prayatne I 674

esforzar(se).
vhe avhyane baddhya130 sadde I 194 hve spardhy abde ca I 1057

ca = calling (pakkosana);
selfishness, pride (ahakra);
challenging (ghaana, sram-
bhakaraa) and making sound
(rava) || llamar, convocar;
egosmo, arrogancia (lit. hacer
yo); actuar con mpetu, retar,
desafiar; y producir un
sonido.
sa-kase acchane = sitting (nisdana) || I 190 ......

sentar(se), estar sentado.
sa-dh131 sandhimhi = connecting; III ......

uniting || conectar; ligar; unir. 231
sa-yuja bandhane = binding || ligar; VIII ......

atar. 295
130
phaddhya (Smith).
131
sandh (Smith).
159
160
sa-sa hisya thutiya ca = I 176 as u stutau; durgatau ity I 729

hurting and praising || daar; Eke (DP)
lastimar; herir y elogiar;
alabar.
sa-sa kathane = talking || hablar. I 179 as a kathane

(Maitreyarakita)
saka smatthiye = ability IV ak aktau V 15

(samatthabhva) || habilidad; 244
capacidad.
saka sattiya = ability (samattha- VII ak aktau V 15

bhva) || habilidad; capacidad. 262
saki sakya = doubting || dudar. I 16 ak i akym I 86
sakka gatyatthe = going || ir. I 17 vak a gatyartha I 100
sakka gatyatthe = going || ir. I 208 vask a gatyartha I 100
sakka bhsane = saying; speaking || VIII valk a paribhae X 34

sagi gamane = going || ir. I 27 rag i gatyartha I 160

lag i gatyartha I 162
sagha hisya = hurting || daar; IV agh a hisym V 21

sa-gma yuddhe = fighting || luchar, VIII sagrma yuddhe X 376

pelear. 334
160
161
saca viyattiya vcya = I 33 ac a vyakty vci I 178

articulado.
saja vissagga-parissajjan- I 48 sj a visarge VI 121

abbhukkiraesu =
relinquishing, abandoning;
embracing and sprinkling ||
abandonar, renunciar; abrazar
y rociar, asperjar.
saja sage = attachment; clinging III sj a visarge IV 69

(lagana) || apego, adhesin. 224
sajja gatiya = going || ir. I 42 asj a gatau I 217
sajja ajjane = procuring; acquiring I 43 arj a arjane I 243

|| obtener; adquirir; procurar.
sajja sajjane = preparing; making VIII ......

ready || preparar, alistar. 295
saja parissage = embracing I 45 svaj a parivage I 1025

(ligana) || abrazar.
saa132 paribhsane = abusing; I 52 ra a paribhae I 319

censurar.
132
raa (Smith).
161
162
saa ruj-visaraa- I 52 a a ruj-viaraa-gaty- I 321

gatyvasnesu133 = paining, avasdaneu
afflicting, oppressing (p);
spreading; pervading
(vippharaa) and end of
going; standing (gatiy
avasna osna abhva-
karaa) || doler, afligir,
oprimir; extender, difundir,
propagar, penetrar, esparcir y
fin del movimiento, pararse,
estar parado.
saa avayave = limb; part; I 53 a a avayave I 335

componente.
saa his-bala-dna-niketanesu = VIII a a hisym X 90

hurting; force, strength; 297
giving and living || herir;
daar; lastimar; fuerza; dar y
residir; habitar; vivir.
saha his-sakilesesu ketave ca I 56 ah a his- I 363

= hurting; defiling; inflicting sakleanayo
and cheating; deceiving || kaitave ca
daar; lastimar; herir y
ensuciar; manchar;
contaminar; infligir y fraude;
engaar.
133
gatyavasraesu (Smith).
162
163
saha sakhra-gatsu = forming; VIII ah a asaskra-gatyo X 28

making and going || formar, 298 vah a asaskra-gatyo X 29
hacer e ir.
saha silghya = praising || VIII ah a lghym X 152

elogiar; alabar. 298
saha asammbhsane = improperly VIII aha smyagavabhae X 310

speaking || hablar 298 vaha asamyagbhae X 310
incorrectamente. (K)
saha ketave = cheating; deceiving || VIII ......

engaar; defraudar. 298
sai rujya = paining; afflicting || I 58 ad i rujy saghte ca I 299

doler; afligir.
saa dne = giving || dar. I 61 a a gatau dne ca I 798

ra a gatau dne ca (DP)
I 799
(DP)
saa abyattasadde = inarticulate I 61 svan a abde I 879

saa dne = giving || dar. VIII ra a dne X 42

302
satta gatiya = going || ir. VIII vart a gatym X 89

308 (DP)
163
164
satta santnakriyya = doing VIII sattra satnakriyym X 358

uninterruptedly (pabandha- 309
kriy, avicchedakaraa) ||
hacer, realizar
ininterrumpidamente.
satha sehille = looseness; weakness I 73 rath i aithilye I 35

|| flojedad; laxitud; relajacin;
debilidad.
satha dubbalye = weakness || VIII ratha daurbalye X 324

debilidad. 311
satha bandhane = binding || ligar; VIII ratha bandhane (Kaktsna

atar. 311 & Hemacandra)
sada sdane = enjoying || disfrutar; I 95 ad tane I 908

gozar de. VI 134
sada assdane = tasting; enjoying || VIII vad a svdane X 263

gustar, saborear; disfrutar; 313 svd a ity eke X 263
gozar de.
sadda saddane = making a noise || VIII abd a abdakriyy X 174

producir un ruido. 313 upasargd vikre
ca
sadda kucchite sadde = making an I 94 pard a kutsite abde I 29

disgusting sound (flatulence)
|| producir un sonido
desagradable (flatulencia).
164
165
sadhu saddakucchiya = belly I 109 dh u abdakutsym I 797

sound; flatulence || sonido del
vientre; flatulencia.
sadhu unde = wetting; moistening || I 110 dh u undane (unde-K) I 922

mojar; humedecer.
sadhu pahasane134 = laughing || VIII dh prahasane X 201

rer; sonrer. 320 (DP)
sana sambhattiya = serving || I 113 san a sabhaktau I 492

servir.
sanja135 sage = attachment; clinging I 44 aj a sage I 1036

(lagana) || apego, adhesin.
santa mappayoge136 = striving; VIII ntv a smaprayoge X 33

endeavoring (ussannakriy) || 308
esforzar(se).
santha santhambhe = supporting || VIII ranth a sadarbhe X 294

sanda pasavane = flowing (sandana, I 95 syand prasravae I 798

avicchedappavatti) || fluir,
correr.
134
pahasane (Smith).
135
saja (Smith).
136
Corrupt reading for smappayoga = compromising; use of kind and friendly words. Lectura corrupta de
smappayoga = compromiso; uso de lenguaje amable y amigable.
165
166
sapa samavye = combination; I 120 ap a samavye I 427

coming together ||
combinacin; juntar(se),
reunirse.
sapa akkose = insulting; abusing || I 121 ap a kroe I 1049

insultar; agraviar.
sappa gatiya = going || ir. I 202 sp gatau I 1032
sabi maale = roundness VIII ......

(parimaalat) || redondez. 328
sabba gatiya = going || ir. I 123 arb a gatau I 450

arb a gatau I 451
sabba gatiya hisya ca = going I 123 arv a hisym I 616

and hurting || ir y daar; arv a hisym I 617
lastimar; herir.
sabba prae = filling || llenar; I 124 marv a prae I 609

completar.
sabbha kathane = talking || hablar. I 127 albh a katthane I 417
sabhja sti-sevanesu = coolness and VIII sabhja prti-daranayo X 341

associating; serving || frescura 295 prti-sevanayo ity
y asociar; servir; asistir. eke
sabhu hisya = hurting || daar; I 125 bh u hisrthau I 457

lastimar; herir.
sama adassane = not seeing; I 133 am a adarane I 843

disappearance || desaparicin; (DP)
ausencia; no ver.
166
167
sama sadde = making sound || I 133 syam u abde I 878

producir sonido.
sama velambe = hanging down || I 133 am a avaikalye I 854

colgar. (avaiklavye-K. (DP)
115; vaiklavye-C.)
sama vitakke = thinking || pensar; VIII syam a vitarke X 154

reflexionar. 333
sama locane = seeing (pekkhana) || VIII am a locane X 156

ver, mirar. 333
samu upasame = peace; calmness || III am u upaame IV 92

paz; tranquilidad, serenidad. 236
samu khede nirodhe ca = fatigue III ram u tapasi khede ca IV 95

(kilamana) and cessation; 236
non-existence
(abhvagamana) || fatiga,
cansancio y cesacin;
inexistencia.
samba sambandhe = connecting; VIII amb a sambandhane X 21

binding tight (dahabandhana) 328 amb a sambandhane X 21
|| conectar; ligar; unir
firmemente.
sambha vissse = confidence; trusting I 129 sranbh u vivse I 794

|| confiar.
sambhu hisya = hurting || daar; I 125 nbh u hisrtha I 458

lastimar; herir.
167
168
sambhu ppue = reaching || alcanzar; IV ......

sara gatiya = going || ir. I 146 s gatau I 982

III 17
sara saddopatpesu = making I 149 sv abdopatpayo I 979

sound and tormenting ||
producir sonido y atormentar.
sara cintya = thinking; I 149 sm cintyam I 980

reflecting || pensar;
reflexionar.
sara akkhepe = throwing || arrojar, VIII svara kepe X 317

tirar; lanzar. 335
sala gatiya = going || ir. I 165 al a gatau I 580
sala sugatiya = going quickly I 165 val a ugamane I 582

(sghagamana) || ir
rpidamente.
sala calane savarae ca = I 166 al a calana- I 519

trembling and restraining; savaraayo
proteger.
sala gamane = going || ir. I 168 al a gatau I 896
168
169
sala kampane = trembling || I 210 al a calana- I 519

temblar; vibrar. savaraayo
salla sugatiya137 = going quickly I 165 vall a ugamane I 583

(sghagamana) || ir
rpidamente.
sava gatiya = going || ir. I 170 av a gatau I 761
sasa susane = being dry || estar I 185 as a svapne II 69

seco, sequedad.
sasa pane = breathing || respirar. I 185 vas a prane II 60
sasu hisya = hurting || daar; I 176 as u hisym I 763

lastimar; herir.
saha parisahane138 = patience I 197 ah a marae I 905

(khanti) || paciencia. X 267
saha sattiya = ability || habilidad; III ah a cakyarthe (aktau- IV 20

capacidad. 240 Kalpadruma)
saha parisahane = patience (khanti) VIII ah a marae X 267

|| paciencia. 350
saa abyattasadde = inarticulate I 201 ......

s pke = cooking || cocinar; I 171 r pke I 848

cocer. II 44
137
sugatiya (Smith).
138
marisane (Smith).
169
170
s tanukarae = making thin; III o tankarae IV 37

reducing || reducir. 238
s antakammani = making an III o antakarmai IV 39

end || terminar. 238
s assdane = tasting; enjoying || III ......

gozar de.
s pke = cooking || cocinar; V ri pke IX 3

cocer. 255
s tanukarae = making thin; VI ......

reducing || reducir. 259
skha bypane = pervading || I 22 kh vyptau I 130

difundir; propagar; penetrar; lkh vyptau I 131
esparcir.
sha balakkre = violence, I 56 hah a pluti-ahatvayo; I 358

application of force; baltkre ity anye
overpowering the weak by
ones own power at will
(attano balena yathjjhsaya
dubbalassa abhibhavana) ||
violencia, uso de fuerza;
subyugar al dbil por medio
del propio poder a voluntad.
sdha sasiddhiya = succeeding; III sdh a sasiddhau V 17

realizar.
170
171
sdha sasiddhiya = succeeding; IV sdh a sasiddhau V 17

realizar.
sna tejane = sharpening (nisna) || I 113 n a tejane I 1044

afilar; aguzar.
sma svntane mantane = VIII sma sntvaprayoge X 333

compromising; use of kind 334
and friendly words
(smappayoga) and calling
(avhyana, pakkosana) ||
transigir, transar, concordar;
emplear lenguaje cordial y
amistoso y llamar, convocar.
sra dubbalye = weakness; VIII sra daurbalye X 322

feebleness || debilidad. 335
ssa anusihiya = admonishing; I 186 s u anuiau II 66

advising || amonestar;
aconsejar.
si sevya = associating; I 171 ri sevym I 945

serving || asociar(se); servir.
si gati-buddhsu = going and I 171 u o vi gati-vddhyo I 1059

knowing || ir y conocer,
comprender.
si nisne = sharpening || afilar; IV i nine V3

aguzar. 246
171
172
si bandhane = binding || ligar; IV i bandhane V2

atar. 246
si bandhane = binding || ligar; V i bandhane IX 5

atar. 255
si sevya = associating; VI ......

serving || asociar(se); servir. 259
sika139 masane = touching; rubbing VIII k a marae X 283

|| tocar; frotar. 283
sikkha vijjopdne = acquiring I 24 ik a vidyopdne I 636

knowledge; learning ||
adquirir conocimiento;
aprender, estudiar.
sighi ghne = smelling (ghnena I 29 ighr i ghre I 174

gandhnubhavana) || oler.
sica gharae = sprinkling; dripping I 38 ic a karae VI 140

|| rociar, asperjar; vertir;
gotear.
sica paggharae = trickling; II ic a karae VI 140

oozing; dripping || gotear; 213
chorrear; escurrir; exudar.
sicca kuane = cutting; dividing || VIII pic(c)h a kuane X 40

cortar; dividir, separar. 292
sia andare = disrespect || falta de I 52 i a andare I 325

respeto. i a I 326
139
ska (Smith).
172
173
sita vae = white color I 67 vit vare I 778

(setavaa) || color blanco.
sida mocane = setting free; I 95 i vid snehana-mocanayo I 745

releasing || libertar, liberar,
poner en libertad, soltar.
sidi stiye = coolness; calmness I 91 vid i vaitye I 10

(stibhva) || frescura;
tranquilidad, serenidad.
sidhu gatiya = going || ir. I 108 idh a gatym I 48
sidhu satthe magalye ca = I 108 idh stre mgalye ca I 49

instructing, teaching (ssana)
and destroying evil
(ppavinsana), cause of
growth (vuddhikraa) ||
instruir, ensear y destruir el
mal, causa para el
crecimiento.
sidhu sardhane = accomplishing III idh u sarddhau IV 83

|| lograr; terminar, consumar; 231
realizar.
siniha ptiya = joy || alegra; III ih a prtau IV 91

regocijo. 241
173
174
sineha sinehane = sticking || VIII ih a snehane X 36

sibha140 katthane = boasting || ostentar. I 126 bh katthane I 408
sila uche = gleaning || espigar. I 169 il a uche VI 70
silgha katthane = praising I 29 lgh katthane I 118

(pasasana) || elogiar; alabar.
silisa ligane = embracing || III li a ligane IV 77

abrazar. 238
silisu upadhe = burning || calor; I 174 li u dhe I 735

quemar; arder.
silesa silesane = adhering || adherir; VIII li a leae X 38

pegar. 345
siloka saghte = accumulating; I 16 lok saghte I 77

collecting (piana) ||
siloa saghte = accumulating; I 61 lo saghte I 485

agregar.
sivu tantasantne = weaving; III iv u tantusatne IV 2

sewing || tejer; entrelazar; 238
coser.
sivu gati-sosanesu = going and III sriv u gati-oaayo IV 3

making dry || ir y secar. 238
140
sbha (Smith).
174
175
sisa hisatthe = hurting || daar; I 174 i a hisrtha I 718

lastimar; herir.
sisa asabbappayoge = not VIII i a asarvopayoge X 274

associating with all || no 348
asociar(se) con nadie o nada;
no usar todo.
sia seane = whistling || silbar. VIII ......

350
s saye = lying; sleeping || I 172 svapne II 22

dormir; acostarse.
sda visaraa-gatyvasnesu = I 95 ad viaraa-gaty- I 907

pervading; spreading avasdaneu
(vippharaa) and sitting down
(nisdana) || difundir;
propagar; penetrar; esparcir;
expandir; extender y
sla samdhimhi = putting I 163 l a samdhau I 556

correctly; coordinating ||
colocar correctamente;
coordinar.
sla upadhrae = holding firmly VIII la upadhrae X 332

(bhuso dhraa); container 343
(patihvasena dhrabhvo)
|| sostener, soportar, mantener,
contener firmemente;
recipiente, contenedor.
175
176
su gatiya = going || ir. I 172 sru gatau I 987
su savane = flowing (sandana) || I 172 ru ravae I 989

fluir, correr.
su141 perae = grinding; crushing || I 172 prerae VI 115

su savane = hearing || oir. IV ......

241
su abhisave = oppressing IV u abhiave V1

(pana); stirring (manthana); 246
uniting (sandhna); bathing
(sinhna) || oprimir; revolver,
menear, batir; unir; baar.
su hisya = hurting || daar; V ......

suka gatiya = going || ir. I 11 uk a gatau K

1.86
sukkha andare = disrespect || falta de I 22 srk a dare (andare-K) I 697

respeto.
sukha takriyya = being that = I 19 sukh a tatkriyym X 383

happiness (sukhya vedanya
kriy) || experimentar eso
(felicidad).
suca soke = grieving; sorrowing || I 30 uc a oke I 198

141
s (Smith).
176
177
sua andare = disrespect || falta de VIII u a andare X 26

respeto. 296
suha gatipaighte = obstructing the I 56 uh a gatipratighte I 364

going (the action) || obstruir la pratighte I 341
accin; cojear; renquear. (DP)
suha lasiye = laziness || pereza; VIII uh a lasye X 103

flojedad; inactividad. 298
suhi sosane = making dry || secar. I 57 uh i oae I 367
suhi sosane = making dry || secar. VIII uh i oae X 104

298
sutta avamocane = loosening; VIII stra veane (vimocane, X 360

releasing || soltar, aflojar; 309 vimo-cana
liberar. mocanbhvo
granthana-K.
317)
sutha hisya = hurting || daar; I 73 rath a hisrtha I 836

lastimar; herir.
sudha soceyye = purity (sucibhva) || III udh a auce IV 82

pureza; purificacin. 231
suna sadde = making sound || I 113 svan a abde I 879

producir sonido.
supa sayane = sleeping || dormir. I 121 i vap a aye II 59
suppa mne = measuring || medir. VIII rp a mne X 79

326 (DP)
177
178
subha dittiya = shining || brillar. I 129, ubh a dptau I 786

210
sumbha hisya bhsane ca = I 125 sumbh a bhae I 434

hurting and saying; talking || (DP)
daar; lastimar; herir y decir;
hablar.
sumbha pahre = striking; hitting || II umbh a bhae, bhsane ity

golpear; pegar. 217 eke, hisym ity
anye
sura issariya-dittsu = supremacy I 155 ur a aivarya-dptyo VI 50

and shining || supremaca,
superioridad y brillar.
sulla sajjane = making || hacer; VIII ulk a atisparane (sarjane- X 85

preparar. 343 K. 287) (DP)
susa sosane = making dry || secar. III u a osae IV 74

240
suha sattiya = ability || habilidad; III uh a cakyarthe (aktau- IV 21

capacidad. 240 Kalpadruma)
sua142 savarae = restraining; I 201 thu a savarae VI 93

protecting || controlar; sthu a savarae VI 94
s143 pasave = producing (janana) || I 172 u prasavaivaryayo I 988

producir; generar; procrear. II 32
142
thua (Smith).
143
su (Smith).
178
179
s pagabbhavimocane(su) = I 172 prigarbhavimocane II 21

releasing the child from the
womb; giving birth || dar a
luz.
s pippasave = giving birth || III priprasave IV 24

dar a luz. 238
sca pesue = slandering; VIII sca paiunye X 327

backbiting (pisuabhva) || 293
difamar; calumniar (cualidad
de aquello que crea divisin).
sca gandhane = spreading of odor VIII ......

|| difusin del olor. 293
sda paggharae = trickling; I 93 d a karae I 25

oozing; dripping || gotear;
chorrear; escurrir; exudar.
sda secane144 = sprinkling || VIII d a karae X 177

rociar, asperjar. 313
sra vikkantiya = exerting; VIII ra vikrntau X 354

striving (vikkamana) || 336
esforzar(se).
sla rujya = paining; afflicting || I 164 l a rujj saghoe ca I 527

doler; afligir. (DP)
144
sevane (Smith).
179
180
se khaye = exhaustion; I 172, ai kaye I 963

destruccin.
se pke = cooking || cocinar; I 172 ai pke I 966

cocer. rai pke I 967
se gatiya = going || ir. I 172, yai gatau I 1012

209
seka gatyatthe = going || ir. I 17 sek gatyartha I 81
seca secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 33 ac a secane sevane ca I 176

selu gatiya = going || ir. I 165 el gatau I 576
sevu secane = sprinkling; pouring || I 171 ev secane I 530

rociar, asperjar; vertir. ev secane I 536
so antakammani = making an VI ......

end || terminar. 259
sou gabbe = pride; arrogance I 52 au garve I 310

(dabbana) || orgullo;
arrogancia.
soa vaa-gatsu = color and I 60 o vara-gatyo I 483

going || color e ir.
soa saghte = accumulating; I 61 ro saghte I 484

agregar.
haa dittiya = shining || brillar. I 53 ha a dptau I 334
180
181
hada karsossagge = releasing I 93 had a purtotsarge I 1026

excrement || evacuar
excremento.
hada karsussagge = voiding of VIII ......

excrement || evacuar 312
excremento.
hana his-gatsu = hurting and I 113 han a his-gatyo II 2

going || daar; lastimar; herir
e ir.
hana hisya = hurting || daar; III ......

hanu apanayane = removing || VII hnu apanayane II 72

remover (quitar algo de un 263
lugar).
hamma gatimhi = going || ir. I 132 hamm a gatau I 495
haya gatiya = going || ir. I 139 hay a gatau I 545
hara harae = existing; being I 152 h harae I 947

(pavattana) || existir; ser.
hara apanayane = removing; I 153 ......

carrying away (nharaa) ||
lugar); llevarse.
hara dne = taking; seizing || I 153 ......

181
182
hariya gati-gelaesu = going and I 139 hary a gati-kntyo I 547

sickness; ailing || ||
enfermedad; dolencia.
hare lajjya = being ashamed || I 154 hr lajjym III 3

estar avergonzado.
hasa hasane = laughing || rer; I 175 has e hasane I 757

sonrer.
hasa sadde = making sound || I 175 hras a abde I 743

producir sonido.
hasu145 lige = embracing I 174 h u alke I 741

(upaghana) || abrazar.
haa silghya = praising || I 200 lghym I 309

elogiar; alabar.
h cge = giving up; abandoning I 190 o h k tyge III 8

h parihniya = loss; decrease || III ......

prdida; disminucin; 240
reduccin.
hi gati-buddhsu upatpe ca = IV hi gatau vddhau ca V 11

going; knowing and vexation; 246
tormenting || ir; conocer;
comprender y molestar;
145
hsu (Smith).
182
183
hisa146 hisya = hurting || daar; I 172 his i hisym VII 19

lastimar; herir. X 286
hikka abyattasadde = inarticulate I 17 hikk a avyakte abde I 914

sound; hiccuping (avibhvi-
tatthasadda, niratthakasadda)
|| sonido inarticulado; hipar.
hikka hisya = hurting || daar; VIII vik a hisy X 146

lastimar; herir. 283 hik a ity eke
hii gatiya = going || ir. I 58 hi i gaty-andarayo I 287
hila hvakarae = flirting; I 169 hil a bhvakarae VI 69

dalliance || flirtear; coquetear.
hildi147 sukhe abyattasadde ca = I 94 hld i avyakte abde sukhe I 27

happiness and inarticulate ca
sound || felicidad; bienestar;
placer y sonido inarticulado.
hisa148 sadde = making sound || I 175 hlas a abde I 744

producir sonido.
hisi hisya = hurting || daar; II his i hisym VII 19

hisi hisya = hurting || daar; VIII his i hisym X 286

146
hisi (Smith).
147
hild (Smith).
148
hisu (Smith).
183
184
ha andare = disrespect || falta de I 200 ......

respeto.
hu dne = giving || dar. I 191 hu dndanayo III 1
hu pasajjakarae = doing in a I 191 h prasahyakarae III 15

certain way (pakrena sajjana-
kriy) || hacer de una cierta
manera.
huccha koille = crookedness || I 39 hur(c)ch kauilye I 226

torcido.
hui saghte = accumulating; I 58 hu i saghte I 288

agregar.
hura koille = crookedness || I 149 hv kauilye I 978

torcido.
hula calane = trembling || temblar; I 167, hval a calane I 843

vibrar. 210 hmal a calane I 844
kampane = trembling ||
temblar; vibrar.
hua gatiya = going || ir. I 200 hu gatau I 375

h gatau I 375
h sattya = being; existing || I 191, ......

ser; existir; estar. 202
184
185
heha vibdhya = oppressing; I 57 heh a vibdhym I 285

harming || oprimir; obstruir;
daar, lastimar.
hesu gatiya = going || ir. I 181 pe gatau (hre -K) I 648
hesu abyattasadde = inarticulate I 181 he avyakte abde I 622-

sound; howling; neighing || hle avyakte abde 23 (DP)
sonido inarticulado; aullar;
relinchar.
hea andare = disrespect || falta de I 200 he andare I 304

respeto.
hea vehane = wrapping; I 201 he a veane I 815

hoa gatiya = going || ir. I 200 ho gatau I 376
hoa andare = disrespect || falta de I 200 ho andare I 305

respeto.
185
186
Root Meaning Pali Root

significado de la raz raz pali
akkosane = abusing; insulting || insultar; khusi VIII 347

agraviar.
akkose = insulting; abusing || insultar; bia I 200, sapa I 121

agraviar.
akkhepe = throwing || arrojar, tirar; sara VIII 335

lanzar.
aggagamane = going first; leading pura I 156

(padhnagamana, pahamam eva
gamana v) || ir primero; liderar.
aggisadda-pakkhepa-maddanesu = mua I 54
sound of fire; putting in, throwing in
and crushing || sonido del fuego; poner
en/dentro de, arrojar en/dentro de y
aplastar, triturar.
acchane = sitting (nisdana) || sentar(se), sa-kase I 190

estar sentado.
acchdane = clothing; covering || cubrir; kubi I 123; VIII 328, nivsa VIII 347, vasa
arropar, vestir. VIII 349
acchedane = cutting || cortar. lupa II 216
ajjane = procuring; acquiring || obtener; ajja I 43, sajja I 43

adquirir; procurar.
ajjave = straightness; rectitude uju I 47

(ujubhva) || rectitud; honestidad.
ajjhayane = reciting; learning || recitar; cacca VIII 292, i I 12

aprender; estudiar.
ajjhoharae = swallowing || tragar; gila I 165

ingerir.
186
187

atisajjane = giving; preaching || dar; disa I 189

predicar; instruir.
atisaye = abundance; excess || vi-sisa VIII 348

abundancia; exceso.
adane = eating || comer. gala I 165, gasu I 183, camu I 131,

camba I 124, chamu I 131, jamu I 131,
jimu I 131, jhamu I 131, amu I 131, tiu
VII 263, bhakkha VIII 284
adassane = not seeing; disappearance || antara-dh III 228, nasa III 240, lupa III
desaparicin; ausencia; no ver. 235, sama I 133
addane = wetness; moistness || tubi I 123, tuhi I 196, divu VIII 345, dubi
humedad. VIII 328, duhi I 196, lubi VIII 328, lubi I
123, vattha VIII 311
addabhve = moistness; wetness kilota I 67, timu I 131

(tintabhva) || humedad.
adhogatiya = going down || ir abajo. tira I 158
adhomukhkarae = facing down || kujja I 49

mirar hacia abajo.
anatabhsane = lying; speaking kudi VIII 312

falsehood || mentir.
andare = disrespect || falta de respeto. aa VIII 296, dh III 231, roa I 200, sia I
52, sukkha I 22, sua VIII 296, ha I 200,
hea I 200, hoa I 200
anukarae = imitating || imitar. anu-vi-dh III 232
anusihiya = admonishing; advising || ssa I 186

amonestar; aconsejar.
187
188

antakammani = making an end || s III 238, so VI 259

terminar.
anvicchya = wishing again and again gilesu I 181

(punappuna icch) || desear, anhelar
una y otra vez.
anvesane = seeking; searching || buscar. maga VIII 286
apanayane = removing || remover oa I 60, luca I 30, hanu VII 263, hara I
(quitar algo de un lugar). 153
aparivesane = avoiding; not moving yama VIII 332

around || evitar; no moverse alrededor.
apavrae = covering; concealing || chada VIII 314, jala VIII 341

cubrir; ocultar; esconder.
appabhve = smallness; littleness || cua VIII 296, pua VIII 296

pequeez; poquedad.
appasde = displeasing; disliking || ka VIII 297

disgustar; desagradar.
appyane = fulfilling || completar; pri VIII 335

cumplir; satisfacer.
apptiya = disliking || disgustar; dusa III 239, dis I 187

desagradar.
appbhve = smallness; littleness || cua I 54, lsa III 239

pequeez; poquedad.
appbhve khamya ca = smallness; masa III 239

littleness and tolerance; patience ||
pequeez; poquedad y paciencia;
tolerancia.
188
189

abbhse = repetition; practice; excesive mana I 113

desire || repeticin; prctica; deseo
excesivo.
abyattasadde = inarticulate sound || kuji I 44, khija I 44, khipa I 121, guji I
sonido inarticulado. 44, desu I 181, nada I 84, niji I 47, phala I
164, rahada I 94, saa I 61, saa I 201,
hikka I 17, hesu I 181
abyattya vcya = inarticulate milecha VIII 294

speech || lenguaje inarticulado.
abhigamane = attaining; obtaining; ghu I 29

understanding (adhigamana) || alcanzar;
conseguir; obtener; entender;
comprender.
abhitthave = praising || elogiar; alabar. thu V 249
abhibhavane = overpowering || ji I 42
conquistar; subyugar; prevalecer;
vencer; superar.
abhimatta-saddesu = intense ghura I 156

intoxication and making sound ||
intoxicacin intensa y producir sonido.
abhimaddane = crushing; subjugating || punsa VIII 345

aplastar; triturar; subyugar.
abhiyoge = engaging in a lawsuit || aa I 58

entablar pleito.
abhivdana-thutsu = saluting and vad VIII 315, vanda I 91

praising || saludar, reverenciar y elogiar;
alabar.
189
190

abhisave = oppressing (pana); stirring su IV 246

(manthana); uniting (sandhna); bathing
(sinhna) || oprimir; revolver, menear,
batir; unir; baar.
alakre = decorating; ornamenting || piadhi I 109, bhsa I 173, bhsa VIII

ornamentar; decorar; adornar. 347, vsi I 173
avakampane = shaking || vibrar; agitar. kapa VIII 327, bh VIII 330
avakkhepe = throwing down kuccha VIII 294

(adhokhipana) || arrojar; tirar abajo.
avakhaane = breaking into pieces; d III 226, dna I 113

destroying || destruir; romper; rasgar.
avagamane = knowing (jnana) || budha III 228

avaghane = inflicting; tormenting || pa VIII 350

afligir; atormentar.
avatthne = standing; remaining || dhara I 158

permanecer; estar de pie.
avadrae = breaking; digging || khanu I 113

romper; quebrar; cavar; excavar.
avabodhane = knowing; understanding || I 50, V 249

avamocane = loosening; releasing || sutta VIII 309

soltar, aflojar; liberar.
avayave = limb; part; constituent || khidi I 89, pisu I 189, vidi I 89, saa I 53
miembro; parte; componente.
190
191

avasasane = hanging down pasu I 183, bhasu I 183, labi I 124

(avalambana) || colgar; caer.
avasandane = dancing; bending the naa VIII 296

body (gattavikkhepa) || danzar; doblar el
aviddhasane = non-destroying || no dhara I 153

destruir.
aviyattya vcya = inarticulate milecha I 39

speech || lenguaje inarticulado.
avhne rodane ca = calling and crying || kusa I 183, kada I 95, kadi I 91, kaladi I
llamar, convocar y llorar. 91
avhyane baddhya sadde ca = calling vhe I 194

(pakkosana); selfishness, pride
(ahakra); challenging (ghaana,
srambhakaraa) and making sound
(rava) || llamar, convocar; egosmo,
arrogancia (lit. hacer yo); actuar con
mpetu, retar, desafiar; y producir un
sonido.
asasaye = no doubting || no dudar. cara VIII 335
asadde = silence; noiseless (nissadda) || kalla I 166

silencio; ausencia de ruido (silencioso).
asabbappayoge = not associating with sisa VIII 348

all || no asociar(se) con nadie.
asammbhsane = improperly speaking saha VIII 298

|| hablar incorrectamente.
191
192

asghacre = acting slowly; dadhi I 109

(asghappavatti) || actuar o mover(se)
lentamente.
assdane = tasting; enjoying || gustar, daka VIII 283, rasa I 175, rasa VIII 348,
saborear. laka VIII 283, liha I 198, sada VIII 313, s
III 238
assda-sinehesu = tasting and sticking || rasa I 175

gustar, saborear y aglutinar, pegar.
assuvimocane = releasing tears; crying || ruda I 103

soltar lgrimas, llorar.
kahane = pulling; dragging || tirar; kaha I 59

arrastrar; jalar.
kirae = scattering; pouring || esparcir, vaha VIII 299

diseminar, desparramar, dispersar;
verter; rociar.
ghte = anger; hatred || enojo; odio; ira. taa VIII 350
ghne = smelling (ghnena sighi I 29

gandhnubhavana) || oler.
darndaresu = respect and disrespect || dara I 151, puttha VIII 311

respeto y falta de respeto.
dna-savaraesu = taking and civu I 171, disa I 184

restraining; protecting || tomar; asir y
controlar; restringir; contener; proteger.
dne = taking; seizing || tomar; asir, kuka I 16, r I 145, 209, l I 159, 209,
agarrar. vaka I 16, hara I 153
pavane = jumping || saltar. khudi I 91
192
193

bhaane = defining; determining || labha VIII 330

definir; determinar.
mantane = calling; addressing || llamar, kua VIII 304, keta VIII 309, gua VIII
convocar; dirigir(se); hablar a alguien. 304
mappayoge = striving; endeavoring santa VIII 308

(ussannakriy) || esforzar(se).
masane = touching; rubbing || tocar; cika VIII 283, masa I 189, sika VIII 283
frotar.
yme = stretching; extending || abarcar; achi I 39

extender.
yse smatthiye ca = fatigue dgha I 29

(kilamana) and ability || fatiga,
cansancio y habilidad; capacidad.
lape = conversing; speaking || dirigir la va I 200

palabra; hablar; conversar.
lasiye = laziness || pereza; flojedad; suha VIII 298

inactividad.
lasiye gatipaighte ca = laziness and kuhi I 56, luhi I 56

obstructing the going (action) || pereza;
flojedad; inactividad y obstruir la accin
de ir; cojear; renquear.
ligane = embracing || abrazar. silisa III 238
lige = embracing (upaghana) || hasu I 174

abrazar.
locane = seeing (pekkhana) || ver; lakkha VIII 285, sama VIII 333
percibir.
193
194

varae = covering || obstruir; cubrir. kla I 163, rudhi III 232, vara VIII 336
varae = shutting, closing (pidahana); rudhi II 212

preventing; obstructing (parirundhana);
hindering (palibuddhana); not to allow
to take away (haritu appadna) ||
cerrar; cubrir; prevenir, obstruir;
impedir, obstaculizar; no permitir que
sea llevado; evitar.
sane = sitting || sentar(se), estar mokkha VIII 285

sentado.
sugatiya = going quickly salla I 165, sala I 165

(sghagamana) || ir rpidamente.
secane = sprinkling || rociar, asperjar. sda VIII 313
secane kharae ca = sprinkling and cuta I 64

flowing || rociar, asperjar y fluir, correr.
icch-kantsu = wishing and delighting kamu VIII 331

|| desear y deleitar(se).
icchya = wishing; desiring; longing || sisi I 183, isu I 190, kakhi I 23, chad
desear. VIII 315, paha I 195, piha VIII 349, lala
VIII 343, vachi I 39, vara VIII 335
issariya-dittsu = supremacy and shining sura I 155

|| supremaca, superioridad y brillar.
issariye = supremacy; domination sa I 187

(issarabhva) || supremaca;
superioridad; dominio.
issya = jealously; envy || envidia. issa I 172
194
195

sahasane = laughing a little; smiling || mhi I 190

sonrer.
sam adhivsane = waiting || esperar (lit. -gamu VIII 334

tener poca paciencia).
hya = exerting; striving || vyama I 133

esforzar(se).
ukkhepe = throwing up (uddha dula VIII 342, lai VIII 298

khipana) || tirar o arrojar hacia arriba.
uggame = raising; going up || surgir; aa I 200, kubbi I 124, gara I 156, gara
salir; aparecer. VIII 335, gu I 28, braha I 198
uggirae = vomiting; ejecting || vomitar; vamu I 134

expeler.
uccrae = uttering || pronunciar; dis VIII 349

articular; hablar; decir.
ujjhane = leaving; abandoning || dejar; chadi I 95

abandonar.
uche = gleaning || espigar. isa I 173, uchi I 39, uddhasa V 255, dhasa
VIII 347, sila I 169
uttsane = to fear || tener miedo; temer. khia I 52
unde = wetting; moistening || mojar; madhu I 110, sadhu I 110

humedecer.
upakkilese = impurity; defiling dupha I 122

(upakkilissana) || impureza; ensuciar;
manchar; contaminar.
upaghte = hurting; injuring || herir; uha I 56, luha I 56, ruha I 56

lastimar; matar.
195
196

upacaye = accumulation || acumular. diha I 197
upatpe = vexation; tormenting || kilisa III 238, ru IV 245

molestar; fastidiar; atormentar.
upadhe = burning || calor; quemar; usu I 174, palusu I 174, pisu I 174, pusu I
arder. 174, silisu I 174
upadhrae = holding firmly (bhuso sla VIII 343

dhraa); container (patihvasena
dhrabhvo) || sostener, soportar,
mantener, contener firmemente;
recipiente, contenedor.
uparame = restraining; abstaining yamu I 132

(viramana) || controlar; restringir;
contener; abstener(se).
upalepane = coating; smearing || goma VIII 334

manchar; untar; cubrir.
upalepe = smearing; staining || untar; lipi I 121

ensuciar; manchar.
upavesane = sitting (nisdana) || sa I 187

upasame = peace; calmness || paz; samu III 236

tranquilidad, serenidad.
upasevya = serving || servir; asistir. laa VIII 350, vsa VIII 347
updne = firmly taking (gahaa) || gaha VI 257

tomar firmemente.
ubbege = terror (utrsa); dread (bhrut) tapa I 122

|| terror; miedo.
196
197

ummde = delusion (muyhana); absence mada III 227

of mindfulness; forgetfulness
(sativippavsa); madness
(cittavikkhepa) || ignorancia; engao;
ilusin; falta de atencin; olvido;
locura.
ummde = madness || locura. mileu I 52, meu I 52, loa I 200
ummne = measuring || medir. tula VIII 341
ummsane = opening the eyes || abrir los by I 138

ojos.
ussagge = rejecting; emiting || descartar; byusa VIII 346, ujjha I 50

rechazar; desechar.
ussaye = to be upright (roha, ubbedha) taa I 53

|| estar vertical; ascender; elevacin;
altura.
ekacariyya = faring alone || andar vahi I 57

solo.
osdane = sinking || hundir; sumergir. mujja I 49
kase = digging (Ns.) || cavar; excavar. khaa I 53
kakkane = making powder; pulverizing capa VIII 326

|| pulverizar; moler.
kakkane = rubbing the body (sarre muci I 33, maca I 33

ubbaana) || frotar o dar masajes en el
cuerpo.
kakhya = doubting || dudar. kakhi I 22, makhi I 22, vakhi I 22
197
198

kaabhede = piercing the ears || chidda VIII 314

perforar la oreja (para colocar aretes).
kaane (khaane) = cutting || cortar. mui I 58
katthane = boasting || ostentar. vibha I 126, sibha I 126
katthane = praising (pasasana) || silgha I 29

elogiar; alabar.
kathana-yuddha-nind-his-dnesu = dipha I 122

talking; fighting; blaming; hurting and
taking; seizing || hablar; luchar, pelear;
reprochar, criticar; daar, lastimar y
kathane = talking || hablar. katha VIII 310, sa-sa I 179, sabbha I

127
kantikarae = beautifying || agradar; ghus I 183, dhsa VIII 346

hacer aquello que agrada.
kantiya = wishing; desiring || desear; lasa I 184, vasa I 185

anhelar.
kampane = trembling || temblar; vibrar. ila I 168, eja I 43, cala I 167, 210, dh V
249, dh VIII 319, sala I 210, hula I 167,
210
kammasampattiya = completion of tra VIII 336, pra VIII 336

work; accomplishing (kammassa
parisampana; nihpana) || conclusin
de un trabajo; lograr; consumar;
realizar.
karae = doing || hacer. kara VII 266
198
199

karsussagge = voiding of excrement gu I 26, hada VIII 312

(vaccakaraa) || evacuar excremento.
karsossagge = releasing excrement || hada I 93

evacuar excremento.
karsossagge mode kya ca = uda I 93

releasing excrement; rejoicing and
sporting; playing || evacuar excremento;
regocijo, alegra; y jugar.
karuya = compassion || compasin. kapa I 120
kalahakammani = quarreling || pelear; tua I 54

disputar.
kalye = goodness (kalyat) || bhai VIII 299

bondad; estado de bueno.
kalle sokhiye ca = goodness (kalya) bhadi I 91

and happiness (sukhino bhvo) ||
bondad, bueno y felicidad.
kme = desire; wish (icch) || deseo. anu-rudha III 232
klopadese = indicating the time || vela VIII 344

indicar el tiempo ( = hora o momento).
kicchajvane = difficult or painful living kaha I 56, khaji VIII 294, taki I 11
(kasirajvana) || vida difcil o dolorosa.
kilamane = fatigue; weariness || fatiga; nitami I 131

cansancio.
kya = playing; sporting || jugar. kuda I 93, kumra VIII 335, khuda I 93,
guda I 93, ramu I 134
199
200

k-vijigis-byavahra-juti-thuti-kanti- divu III 219

gati-sattsu = sporting; charming
(ramaa); living (vihra); wish to
conquer (vijayicch); trading (vohra);
splendor (sobh); praising (thoman);
beauty (kamanyat); going (gamana);
ability (smatthiya) || jugar; encantar;
fascinar; residir; habitar; vivir; deseo de
conquistar; comerciar; trocar;
esplendor; elogiar; alabar; belleza; ir;
kucchane = reproaching || reprochar, kalaha I 196, garaha I 196

criticar; desprecio, desdn.
kucchya = reproaching (garah) || ku VI 259, nidi I 89

reprochar, criticar.
kucch-sannikarisesu = reproaching, nida I 97, neda I 97

blaming (garah) and to be near ||
reprochar, criticar y estar cerca.
kucchite gamane = despicable going || ir d I 82

inapropiadamente.
kucchite sadde = making an disgusting kadda I 86, sadda I 94

sound (flatulence) || producir un sonido
desagradable (flatulencia).
kuilagatiya = going crookedly || ir aka I 12, 210, agga I 28

torcidamente.
kuilya gatiya = moving crookedly aga I 210

|| ir torcidamente.
kuumbadhrae = supporting a family tanta VIII 308

|| sustentar una familia.
200
201

kuane = cutting; dividing || cortar; sicca VIII 292

dividir, separar.
ketave = cheating; deceiving || engaar; saha VIII 298

defraudar.
ketave gatyakkhepe ca = cheating; maghi I 29

deceiving and jumping up || engaar y
saltar, brincar.
koill-appbhvesu = crookedness and kuca I 30

smallness; littleness || deshonestidad;
cualidad de torcido y pequeez;
poquedad.
koille = crookedness || deshonestidad; kathi I 73, kua I 54, tua I 61, nasa I 183,
cualidad de torcido. bhuja I 48, vaka I 12, huccha I 39, hura I
149
kodhe = to be angry || enojo, odio, ira. bhma I 132, bhma VIII 334
kope = to be angry || enojo, odio, ira. kudha III 231, kupa III 235, cai I 58
khantiya = patience || paciencia. khapi VIII 326
khaye = exhaustion; destruction || khara I 153, khi I 18, khi III 222, kh IV
agotamiento, acabamiento; destruccin. 245, khe I 209, je I 42, 209, tapa VIII 326,
d III 226, byaya VIII 334, se I 172, 209
khdana-sattsu = eating and existing || khe I 19

comer y existir; ser.
khipan-uanesu = throwing and i I 57

flying up || arrojar, tirar; lanzar;
descartar y volar; despegar.
201
202

khede nirodhe ca = fatigue (kilamana) samu III 236

and cessation; non-existence
(abhvagamana) || fatiga, cansancio y
cesacin; inexistencia.
khepane = throwing; casting || arrojar, ra VIII 336

tirar; lanzar; descartar.
khepane gatiya ca = throwing; passing aja I 43

or spending time and going || arrojar,
tirar; pasar tiempo e ir.
khepe = throwing (khipana) || arrojar, asu III 239, kala VIII 342, khipa IV 245,
tirar; lanzar; descartar. khoa VIII 297, ipa I 121, pila VIII 342
gati-gandhanesu = going and spreading v I 170, v III 238

of odor || ir y difusin del olor.
gati-gelaesu = going and sickness, hariya I 139

ailing || ir y enfermedad, dolencia.
gaticturiye = skillfulness in going dhora I 146

(gatichekabhva) || destreza o habilidad
en ir.
gati-theriyesu = going and firmness || ir dhu I 107

y firmeza; constancia.
gati-desanesu = going and preaching || ir ri V 254

y predicar; instruir.
gatinivattiya = stopping from going; h I 55, h III 225, th I 68

standing (uppajjamnassa gamanass
upacchedo) || detener el movimiento;
pararse.
gatipaighte = limping (gatipaihanana) khola I 165, ghora I 146

|| cojear; renquear.
202
203

gatipaighte = obstructing the going suha I 56

(the action) || obstruir la accin; cojear;
renquear.
gati-ppuesu = going and reaching || ir y I 137, y III 237

y alcanzar; realizar; llegar, arribar.
gati-pjansu = going and venerating; acu I 30

honoring || ir y venerar; honrar.
gati-buddhsu = going and knowing || ir si I 171

y conocer, comprender.
gati-buddhsu upatpe ca = going; hi IV 246

knowing and vexation; tormenting || ir;
conocer; comprender y molestar;
gati-bhakkhaesu = going and eating || cara I 147

ir y comer.
gatimhi = going || ir. ama I 132, chama I 132, dama I 132,

mima I 132, hamma I 132
203
204

gatiya = going || ir. aa I 53, ahi I 57, abbha I 125, aya I 139,
ara I 158, ahi I 196, i I 1, ia I 53, iu VII
263, ila I 169, isi I 189, ja I 44, esu I 181,
188, kaa I 53, kapi VIII 326, kabba I 123,
kassa I 183, kia I 53, kelu I 165, khabba I
123, khi V 247, khipi I 121, khelu I 165,
gaa I 61, gabba I 123, gamu I 134, 202,
g I 28, 209, cacu I 30, cabba I 123,
caya I 139, cu I 209, celu I 165, jua I
201, jesu I 181, i III 225, tacu I 30,
taya I 139, tila I 165, dasu I 183, dapha
I 122, daphi I 122, du I 82, dhaja I 42,
dhaji I 42, nakkha I 22, nesu I 181, paa I
53, pai I 58, pata I 63, pata VIII 309,
patha I 73, pathi VIII 310, pada III 227,
pada VIII 314, pabba I 123, paya I 139,
para VIII 335, pala VIII 344, pilahi I 196,
pisi I 176, pu I 209, pe I 119, pelu I 165,
pesu I 176, plu I 209, phaa I 61, belu I
165, macu I 30, mabba I 123, mabbha I
125, maya I 139, muna I 117, raa I 61,
raya I 139, rahi I 195, risa I 189, ruhi I
57, luhi I 57, vagga I 27, vaja I 42,
vacu I 30, vappha I 122, vabba I 123,
vabbha I 125, vaya I 139, viccha I 39,
velu I 165, sajja I 42, satta VIII 308,
sappa I 202, sabba I 123, sara I 146, sala I
165, sava I 170, sidhu I 108, su I 172,
suka I 11, se I 172, 209, selu I 165, haya I
139, hii I 58, hua I 200, hesu I 181,
hoa I 200
gatiya = going fast (sghagati) || ir ju I 42, 209

rpidamente.
204
205

gatiya dity-dnesu ca = going, asa I 184

shining and taking; seizing; grasping ||
ir; brillar y tomar; asir, agarrar.
gatiya ycane ca = going and begging adda I 86

|| ir y mendigar (pedir comida).
gatiya rosane ca = going and anger || ru I 145

ir y enojo; odio; ira.
gatiya hisya ca = going and abba I 123, dua I 61, sabba I 123
hurting || ir y daar; lastimar; herir.
gativekalle = deficiency in going khaji I 43

(limping) || dificultad en caminar;
cojear; renquear.
gati-sakhynesu = going and kala VIII 343

calculating || ir y contar; calcular.
gati-sukha-sevanesu = going, happiness vta VIII 309

(sukhana) and associating; serving || ir;
felicidad y asociar; servir; asistir.
gatisuddhiya = clear going; running || dhvu I 171

correr; puro ir.
gati-sosanesu = going and making dry || kas I 187, khanda I 91, sivu III 238
ir y secar.
gattavicuane = injuring the body || vaa VIII 304

lastimar, daar el cuerpo.
gattavinme = bending the body or the jabha I 127, jabhi I 127, nata III 225, mile
limbs || doblar el cuerpo o los I 166
miembros.
205
206

gatyakkhepe = jumping up; going up raghi I 29, laghi I 29

(gatiy akkhepo) || saltar, brincar, ir
hacia arriba.
gatyatthe = going || ir. ikhi I 22, ukha I 22, kaki I 17, ika I 17,
eka I 208, tika I 17, nakha I 22, makha I
22, rakha I 22, rakhi I 22, rikhi I 22,
lakha I 22, lakhi I 22, lagha I 208, vaki I
17, sakka I 17, sakka I 208, seka I 17
ganthane = knitting; tying || tejer; atar; dabhi I 129

entrelazar.
ganthe = tying; making a knot gupha I 122, nala I 167, paa VIII 297,
(ganthikaraa) || atar; amarrar; anudar, vaa VIII 297
hacer un nudo.
gandhane = spreading of odor || difusin sca VIII 293

del olor.
gandhopdne = smelling || oler. gh I 28, gh III 222
gabbe = pride (dabbana) || orgullo. sou I 52
gamane = going || ir. agi I 27, igi I 27, ghua I 61, ghua I 61,
tagi I 27, magi I 27, ragi I 27, rigi I 27,
lagi I 27, ligi I 27, vagi I 27, sagi I 27,
sala I 168
gavesane = seeking; searching || buscar. magga VIII 286
gahae = taking || tomar. -d III 74, 226, gaha I 197, ghai I 61,
ghii I 61, ghui I 61, pila I 169, bhasa
VIII 347
giddhiya = greed; attachment || lubha III 235

codicia, deseo; apego.
206
207

guttabhsane = protected speaking; manta VIII 308

confidential speaking || lenguaje
confidencial; consultar.
gopana-jigucchanesu = protecting and gupa I 120

disgusting; disliking || proteger; cuidar y
disgustar.
ghaane = striving (vyma-karaa) || ghaa VIII 296

esforzar(se).
gharae = sprinkling; dripping || rociar, sica I 38

asperjar; verter; gotear.
ghasane = eating || comir. kua I 201
ghasane blye ca = eating and khua I 201

childhood || comer y niez; infancia.
ghoravsite kakhya ca = making an dakhi I 23, dhakhi I 23

unpleasant sound and doubting || emitir
un sonido desagradable y dudar.
cammani ptubhve = manifestation of ruha I 197

the skin || manifestacin de la piel,
corteza, cuero, etc.
caye = piling || apilar, amontonar; ci IV 245, ci V 247

acumular.
carae = walking; going || caminar; ir. cara I 146
calane = trembling || temblar; sacudir; khala I 165, ghaa VIII 296, bhesu I 184,
vibrar. hula I 167, 210
207
208

calane savarae ca = trembling and vala I 166, valla I 166, sala I 166
restraining; protecting || temblar; vibrar
y controlar; restringir; contener;
proteger.
cavane = falling; dying cu I 33, cu VIII 292
cge = giving up; abandoning || dejar; oha I 198, caja I 44, maa I 62, raha I
abandonar; renunciar. 195, raha VIII 349, h I 190
cittakarae, kadci dassane pi = making citta VIII 310

variegated (vicittabhvakaraa) and
seeing that is rare or unusual || abigarrar
y ver lo que es raro o inusual.
cittasamussagge = relinquishing ones byaya VIII 334

mind || abandonar la mente.
cittkarae = making variegated liga VIII 285

(vicitrabhvakaraa) || abigarrar;
diferenciar.
cintya = thinking || pensar; cinta VIII 305, jhe I 49, sara I 149
reflexionar.
cuane = grinding; crushing || aplastar; pisa II 216

moler; triturar.
cumbane = kissing || besar. nikkha I 22, nis I 187
ceya = urging || incitar, instigar. cea I 54
cetantulye = urging; being equal || cevi I 171

incitar, instigar; ser igual.
cetya = striving; exerting; urging || ha I 196, ghaa I 54, tadi I 91

esforzar(se); incitar, instigar.
208
209

cehan-khyna-nivsesu = marking vida VIII 312

(saa), talking (kathana) and living
(nivasana) || marcar, percibir; hablar y
residir, vivir.
coriye = theft (corassa bhva) || robo; thena VIII 322

hurto.
chaane = discarding || descartar; chaa VIII 297

desechar.
chaane = throwing away; rejecting || khipa I 121, chaa VIII 299

arrojar; tirar; descartar.
chijjane = cutting itself || cortar(se). chidi III 226
chedana-praesu = cutting and fillling vaddha VIII 319

|| cortar y llenar; completar.
chedane = cutting || cortar. kati I 67, kati II 214, kua I 54, kua VIII
296, cua I 54, cua VIII 296, cui VIII
297, cua I 62, chu I 39, chua I 54, chua
VIII 296, che III 224, l V 255, vacchu I
40
chedane vilekhane ca = cutting and khura I 156

scratching; writing || cortar y rayar;
escribir.
chede = cutting || cortar. kai VIII 298, khai VIII 298
janane = making; producing || hacer; jana III 233

producir; generar.
jaye = conquering; winning || ji I 42, ji V 248

conquistar; triunfar; ganar.
209
210

jniya = loss; deprivation || prdida; ji V 248

privacin; carencia.
jigucchya = disliking; loathing || yu VIII 334

disgustar; desagradar; detestar.
jivhmathane = moving the tongue || lai I 59

mover la lengua.
a-cint-nismanesu = knowing; veu I 61

thinking and listening, observing ||
conocer, comprender; pensar,
reflexionado y escuchar, or, observar.
e = knowing (jnana) || conocer; kita I 67, mana III 232, muna V 251, vida
comprender. I 103
hne = standing || estar de pie; detener thala I 167

el movimiento.
takriyya = being that = happiness sukha I 19

(sukhya vedanya kriy) ||
experimentar eso (felicidad).
takriyya = experiencing that = dukkha I 19

suffering (dukkhya vedanya kriy) ||
experimentar eso (sufrimiento).
tanukarae = making thin; reducing || taccha I 41, s III 238, s VI 259

reducir.
tantasantne = weaving; sewing || tejer; y I 143, v V 254, ve I 170, sivu III 238
entrelazar; coser.
tapane = restraining || controlar; takkha I 22

210
211

tappana-kantsu = to be pleased and to p V 252

like || estar satisfecho, complacerse y
gustar.
tane = beating; striking || golpear; jasa VIII 346, taa VIII 350, tai I 58,
pegar. byadha III 232
titikkhya = enduring; forgiving || marisa VIII 348

soportar, aguantar; tolerar; perdonar.
titti-paightesu = satisfying (tappana) caka I 12

and striking || satisfacer; saciar y
golpear; pegar; chocar.
tittiya = satiating; satisfying (tappana) tapha I 122, tisa I 184

|| satisfacer; saciar.
tuhiya = liking; satisfaction || tusa III 240, vida II 215

agradar; satisfacer.
tejane = sharpening (nisna) || afilar; sna I 113

aguzar.
tosana-nisnesu = giving pleasure and apa VIII 322

sharpening || complacer; satisfacer;
agradar y afilar; aguzar.
toane = hurting; injuring || herir; tui I 58, tua I 200

lastimar; matar.
thapane = placing; putting || colocar; opa VIII 327, thapa VIII 327
poner.
thambhe = rigidity of mind (cittassa mana VIII 321

thaddhat) || rigidez de la mente.
thavane = praising (thuti) || elogiar, akka VIII 283, ia VIII 350

alabar.
211
212

thuti-moda-mada-supana-gatsu = madi I 92
praising; rejoicing; intoxicating, pride;
sleeping and going || elogiar, alabar;
regocijar; intoxicar, orgullo; dormir e ir.
thutiya = praising || elogiar; alabar. a I 201, thu I 68, dica I 31, nu I 112
thliye = thickness; bigness || estado de tiva I 170, niva I 170, piva I 170, miva I
grueso o grande. 170, vaha I 56
theriye = firmness (thirabhva) || bada I 84

firmeza; constancia.
theriye dhiti-hissu ca = firmness; khada I 84

energy and hurting || firmeza;
constancia; energa y daar; herir;
lastimar.
theyyakarae = stealing (thenana, kuju I 42, khuju I 42, gaecu I 30, gucu I
corik) || robar; hurtar. 30
theyye = stealing (thenana, corik) || cura VIII 278, musa I 173, musa V 256,
robar; hurtar. rui I 54, lui I 54, lui VIII 297
dasane = stinging; biting khadda I 86, dasa I 179, dasa VIII 346
(dantasukatakattik kriy) || morder;
picar.
daavinipte = punishing || castigar. daa VIII 299
dabbavinimaye = exchange of goods; k V 247

trading (kayavikkayavasena bhaassa
parivattana) || intercambio de
substancia (bienes); comerciar.
dabbe = egotism; arrogance (ahakra) kabba I 124, khabba I 124, gabba I 124
|| egosmo; arrogancia (lit. hacer yo).
212
213

damane = taming || domar, amansar; damu III 237

domesticar; entrenar.
dassan-akesu = seeing (passana) and ikkha I 26, lakkha VIII 283

marking (lajana) || ver y marcar.
dassane = seeing || ver. loka I 15, loka VIII 278, loca I 33, loca
VIII 291
dassane dasane ca = seeing and dasi VIII 346

stinging; biting || ver y morder; picar.
dne = giving || dar. caa I 61, d I 74, d III 226, dsu I 184,
panu VII 263, vesu I 190, saa I 61, saa
VIII 302, hu I 191
dne gatiya ca = giving and going || khaji I 45

dar e ir.
dna-gati-his-dna-rakkhsu = daya I 142

giving; going; hurting; taking; seizing
and protecting || dar; ir; herir; daar;
lastimar; tomar y proteger; cuidar.
dhe = burning || calor; quemar; arder. kui VIII 297, kui I 58, jhapa VIII 323,
tapa VIII 327, dara I 158
dhe = heat (uha) || calor. usa VI 258
dihpasahre = removing of sight; andha VIII 320

destruction of sight (cakkhusaitya
dihiy upasahro, apanayana
vinso v) || eliminacin, destruccin de
la vista.
ditti-kantsu = shining and desire; wish kana I 112

|| brillar y deseo.
213
214

dittiya = shining (virocana) || brillar. eja I 45, kaca VIII 293, ghiu VII 263, jala
I 166, juta I 66, 210, juta VI 259, jhe I 50,
tapa I 122, thivu I 170, dpa III 235, bh I
125, bhja I 45, bheja I 45, rja I 45, vaca
I 33, vaci I 33, subha I 129, 210, haa I 53
dittiya = shining (virjanat) and ksu I 181, bhsu I 181

manifesting (pkaat) || brillar y
manifestacin (ser claro o evidente).
dittiya paighte ca = shining and vaka I 16

striking || brillar y golpear; pegar;
chocar.
dittiya bhassane ca = shining and laji I 44

talking; conversing || brillar y hablar;
conversar.
dittiya rocane ca = shining; splendor, ruca I 34, 210

beauty (sobh) and liking (ruci) ||
brillar; esplendor, belleza, hermosura y
agradar, gustar.
ditti-vedhanesu = shining and piercing || ddhi I 110

brillar y perforar; atravesar; penetrar.
dniye = wretchedness; poverty khidi III 227

(dnabhva) || pobreza; miseria.
dukkha-bhaya-calanesu = suffering, byatha I 73

fearing and trembling || sufrir; temer y
duggatiya = poverty (dukkhassa gati dalidda I 104

patih) || pobreza; miseria.
214
215

dubballe = weakness; feebleness || kipa VIII 327

debilidad.
dubbalye = weakness || debilidad. satha VIII 311, sra VIII 335
devane = lamenting; sorrowing || deva I 171, devu I 171

devapja-sagatakaraa-dna- yaja I 47
dhammesu = venerating; honoring the
Buddha, etc. (Buddhdipj);
connecting (samodhnakaraa);
renunciating (pariccga) and spiritual
practices (jhnasldi) || venerar, honrar;
honrar al Buddha, etc.; unir, conectar;
renunciar y prctica de moralidad (sla),
concentracin de absorcin (jhna), etc.
devasadde = thundering (megha-sadda) gada VIII 313, thana VIII 321

|| tronar; sonido de tormenta.
dosane = offending; angering || ofender; dusa III 239

causar enojo; molestar.
dvedhkarae = making into two; chida VIII 314, chidi II 215

cutting; dividing || hacer dos partes;
cortar; dividir; separar.
dhae = prosperity (dhanana) || jala I 167, dhana I 116

prosperidad.
dharae = existing (vijjamnat) || dhara I 153

existir.
215
216

dhra-ucchya-pjanesu = holding; maci I 33

bearing; removing impurities
(malaharaa) and venerating; honoring
|| sostener; soportar; mantener; cargar;
eliminar impurezas y venerar, honrar.
dhrae = holding; bearing || sostener; gabbha I 127, dadha I 108, dhara VIII
soportar; mantener. 336, dh I 105, pusa VIII 347, mala I 166,
malla I 166
dhovane = washing || lavar; limpiar. -camu VIII 331, dhovu I 170
natiya = bending || doblar. naa I 53
namane = bending; inclining || namu I 133

inclinar(se); doblar(se).
nayane = leading || guiar; conducir; nara I 151

llevar.
naye = leading; guiding || guiar; n I 110

conducir; llevar.
nsane = destroying || destruir; hacer jabhi VIII 330, nakka VIII 282, pasi VIII
perecer. 345, vakka VIII 282
nikropakresu = striking and helping; yata VIII 309

supporting || esforzar(se) y ayudar;
apoyar.
niketane = living (nivsa) || residir; pubba VIII 328

habitar; vivir.
nikkarse = lightness (lahubhva) || tla I 164

liviandad, levedad.
216
217

niggirae = trickling; oozing; dripping gira I 155

(paggharaa) || gotear; chorrear;
escurrir; exudar.
nihubhane = spitting (kheaptana) || opa I 121, dhimha I 200

escupir.
nitthunane = moaning; groaning || thu V 249

gemir, plair; lamentar.
nidampane = removing seeds and leaves nidapi I 121

without cutting or breaking the plant ||
quitar las semillas y las hojas sin cortar
o daar la planta.
nidassane = pointing out; indicating || khivu I 170, khivu III 238, dhivu I 170,
sealar; indicar; explicar. dhivu III 238
niddakkhaye = awakening || despertar jgara I 154, jgara VII 277, dhu I 197
(lit. destruccin del sueo).
nipajjya = lying down; sleeping || tuvaa VIII 297

dormir; acostarse.
nipue = to be clever; to be skillful || ser pua I 61

hbil; ser diestro; ser inteligente.
nippke = cooking || cocinar; cocer. katha I 74
nibbattiya = producing; giving fruit || phala I 164

producir; dar fruto.
nimlane = winking || parpadear; cerrar kaa VIII 302, mla VIII 342
los ojos.
nimelane = closing the eyes || cerrar los mla I 162

ojos; parpadear.
217
218

nimmajjane = squeezing; rubbing || vula VIII 342

apretar; comprimir; estrujar; frotar.
nivrae = preventing; warding off || rubhi I 129

prevenir; evitar; impedir.
nivse = living || residir, vivir. khi I 18, maha I 56, vasa I 184
nivse kodha-hissu ca = living; to be khi III 222

angry and hurting || residir, vivir; enojo,
odio, ira y daar, herir.
nivse rogpanayane ca = living and kita I 65

removing illness; curing || residir, vivir
y curar, sanar.
nisne = sharpening; sharpness tija VI 259, tija VIII 295, bundi I 97, si IV
(tikkhat) || afilar; aguzar. 246
nisne khamya ca = sharpening tija I 45

(tikkhatkaraa) and patience (khanti) ||
afilar; aguzar y paciencia.
ncagatiya = going or existing low pakka I 10

(hnagamana, hnappavatti) || ir o existir
bajo.
pakathane = telling; announcing; kh I 17, khy I 17

preaching (cikkhana, desana) || decir;
anunciar; predicar.
paksane = showing || mostrar; indicar; laja VIII 295

exponer.
pakkhepane = putting into; throwing mi IV 245

into || poner en/ dentro de; arrojar
en/dentro de.
218
219

paggharae = trickling; oozing; sica II 213, sda I 93

dripping || gotear; chorrear; escurrir;
exudar.
pajana-kanti-asana-khdana-gatsu = v I 170
trembling (calana); liking (abhiruci);
eating (bhattaparibhoga); chewing
(pvdibhakkhana) and going (gamana)
|| temblar, vibrar; agradar; comer
(disfrutar la comida); masticar e ir.
pajjane = being; existing || ser; existir. upa VIII 326
pahe = questioning || interrogar, puccha I 39

preguntado, inquirir.
paighte = striking || golpear; pegar; khoda I 91, ghua I 54, thaka VIII 281,
chocar. rua I 54, lua I 54, luha I 57
paighte gatiya ca = striking dhaka I 12

(paihanana) and going || golpear; pegar;
chocar e ir.
paie = promising; acknowledging; mua I 61

admitting || prometer; reconocer;
admitir.
paidna-dnesu = restitution, me I 130

restoration; taking; seizing || restitucin,
devolucin y tomar, asir.
paibaddhe = depending; tied or bound khabhi I 127

to || depender; ligado.
paibaddhe = to be stiff || estar rgido, thabhi I 127

duro, inflexible.
219
220

paisajjane = forming; making || formar; ajja VIII 295

hacer; producir.
paiharae = bringing back || traer; pesa VIII 345

devolver.
patih-nissaya-gandhesu = footing; gdha I 108

supporting and smell || base (lugar
donde pararse); apoyar; sostener y olor.
patihya = supporting; footing || tala VIII 341, mla I 164

apoyar; soportar; mantener; sostener.
patitthambhe = supporting || apoyar; bila I 162

soportar; mantener; sostener; base;
apoyo.
patiyatane = making effort yata I 65, raca VIII 292

(vymakaraa) || esforzar(se) (lit. hacer
esfuerzo).
pattiya = reaching; attaining (ppana) bh VIII 328

|| alcanzar; realizar; llegar, arribar.
padavikkhepe = walking (padas kamu I 131

gamana) || caminar (lit. ir con el pie).
padhniye paribhsana-hisdnesu ca varaha I 196, valaha I 196

= striving; abusing; blaming; hurting
and taking; seizing || esforzar(se);
denostar; reprochar; criticar; censurar;
daar; herir; lastimar y tomar.
paprae = filling || llenar; completar. duha I 197
pamaddane = crushing; overcoming || mua I 54

aplastar; triturar; superar; vencer.
220
221

pamde = neglecting || desatender, yucha I 39

descuidar.
payatane = striving || esforzar(se). jehu I 196, yasu III 239, yesu I 181, vhu
I 196, vehu I 196
paramissariye = supremacy || idi I 87

supremaca; superioridad.
parikatthane = boasting || ostentar. caha VIII 349
parikjane = roaring (gajjana) || rugir, divu VIII 344

bramar.
parighte = killing; injuring all around khadi I 105

(samantato hanana) || matar; daar o
lastimar todo alrededor.
paritakkane = reflecting; considering || jusa VIII 348

pensar; reflexionar; considerar.
paritpe = tormenting || atormentar. du III 226
paridevane = lamenting || lamentar. kalidi I 91
paribbhamane = turning round and cigula VIII 344

round; rotating || dar vueltas; voltear;
girar; rodar.
paribrhane = increasing; growing thla VIII 344

(vahana) || aumentar; crecer;
incrementar.
paribhsana-tajjanesu = abusing; jajjha I 50

blaming; censuring and threatening,
menacing || denostar; reprochar; criticar;
censurar y amenazar.
221
222

paribhsana-vajjanesu = abusing; cacca I 30, jacca I 30

blaming; censuring and avoiding ||
denostar; reprochar; criticar; censurar y
evitar; abstener(se) de.
paribhsana-hisdnesu = abusing; bhala I 166, bhalla I 166

blaming; censuring; hurting and taking;
seizing || denostar; reprochar; criticar;
censurar; daar; herir; lastimar y tomar.
paribhsane = abusing; blaming; caa I 54, dea I 54, bhaa I 54, bhai I 58,
censuring || denostar; reprochar; criticar; raha I 56, saa I 52
censurar.
paribhoge = enjoying || disfrutar; gozar vaaji I 49

de.
parime = measuring || medir. nikka VIII 283, m V 253, m VII 265
pariyyanabhve = going round || dar potha I 74

vueltas; ir alrededor.
pariyesane = searching; seeking || isa I 190

buscar.
parivattane = turning or rolling round || ghua I 54

dar vueltas; voltear; girar; rodar; rotar.
parivehane = wrapping; covering || gudha III 232

envolver; cubrir.
parivesane = attending; feeding || asistir, yama I 133

servir; alimentado, dar de comer.
parisakkane = endeavoring; trying || caha I 195

esforzar(se); empear(se); intentar.
222
223

parisahane = patience (khanti) || saha I 197, saha VIII 350

paciencia.
parissage = embracing (ligana) || saja I 45

abrazar.
parihniya = loss; decrease || prdida; na VIII 321, h III 240

disminucin; reduccin.
parihse = laughing || rer; sonrer. pai VIII 298
palambhane = deceiving; cheating vacu VIII 292

(upalpana) || engaar; defraudar.
pavattiya = existing; happening || bye I 139

existir; ocurrir; suceder, acontecer.
pavane = cleansing (sodhana) || limpiar; p I 118, p V 252

purificar.
pavesane = entering || entrar. visa I 189
pasajjakarae = doing in a certain way hu I 191

(pakrena sajjanakriy) || hacer de una
cierta manera.
pasava-kiledanesu = flowing (sandana) udi II 215

and wetness; moistness (tintat) || fluir y
humedad.
pasavane = flowing (sandana, sanda I 95

avicchedappavatti) || fluir, correr.
pasavane = flowing; passing urine || mutta VIII 309

fluir, correr; orinar.
223
224

pasave = growing; bringing forth; pusa I 173, s I 172

producing (janana) || crecer; aumentar;
producir; generar; procrear.
pasde = clearness; brightness || thuca I 33

claridad; luminosidad.
pahasane = laughing || rer; sonrer. sadhu VIII 320
pahre = striking; hitting || golpear; putha VIII 311, sumbha II 217

pegar.
pahsane = laughing || rer; sonrer. masa VIII 348
pke = cooking || cocinar; cocer. paca I 34, bhaja I 47, randha VIII 319, s I
171, s V 255, se I 172
pgabbiye = boldness; impudence vusa IV 246

(kya-vc-manehi pagabbabhvo) ||
audacia, osada, atrevimiento;
impudencia (con respecto a las acciones
del cuerpo, lenguaje y mente).
pagabbhavimocane(su) = releasing s I 172

the child from the womb; giving birth ||
dar a luz.
pacge = abandonment of life; dying mara I 157

|| abandono de la vida; morir.
padhrae = keeping the life || jva I 170

mantener la vida.
pane = breathing (sasana) || respirar; ana I 115, bala I 167, sasa I 185
existir.
pippasave = giving birth || dar a luz. s III 238
224
225

ptubhve = manifesting || jan III 233

manifestar(se); aparecer.
pne = drinking || beber. cusa I 173, dhe I 107, p I 117
ppakarae = doing evil || hacer el mal. agha VIII 290
ppane = reaching; leading || alcanzar; n I 112

realizar; llegar, arribar; guiar; conducir;
llevar.
ppue = reaching || alcanzar; realizar; apa IV 245, appa VII 265, vaha I 197,
llegar, arribar. sambhu IV 245
plana-praesu = protecting and filling para I 154

|| proteger, cuidar y llenar; completar.
plan-abyavaharaesu = protecting bhuja II 213

(rakkhaa) and swallowing
(ajjhoharaa) || proteger, cuidar y tragar,
ingerir.
plane = protecting (rakkhaa) || ava I 170, taggha I 29, t III 225, te I 62,
proteger; cuidar. 209, de I 83, 209, rakkha I 22
pipsya = thirst || sed. ucha I 39, tasa III 239, tasa VI 258
pane = gladdening; satisfying || tapa III 235, tapa VIII 327, pa I 61

alegrar; regocijar; satisfacer.
ptikkhaye = loss of joy || prdida de la gile I 166

alegra.
ptiya = joy || alegra; regocijo. p IV 245, siniha III 241
ptiya-kanesu = joyfulness (ptassa kila I 168

bhvo) and playing; sporting (k) ||
alegra; regocijo y jugar.
225
226

pti-sevanesu = joy and associating || jusi I 190, jusi VI 258

alegra; regocijo y asociar(se).
pucchya = questioning || interrogar, paha I 194

preguntado, inquirir.
puthakammani = separating bhja VIII 295

(puthakkaraa, visukriy) || separar,
dividir.
pj-nismanesu = venerating, honoring cyu I 144

(pjan) and looking; hearing (olokana,
savana) || venerar; honrar y mirar; or.
pjya = venerating; honoring || acca I 30, acca VIII 293, araha I 196,
venerar; honrar. araha VIII 349, pja VIII 294, maha I 196,
maha VIII 349, yakkha VIII 284
pjya pemane vmasya = mna VIII 321

venerating; honoring; loving and
investigating || venerar, honrar; amar,
querer e investigar.
prae = filling || llenar; completar. ubbha I 129, ubha I 129, umbha I 129,
ta VIII 302, pabba I 124, p I 118,
pubba I 124, pra I 146, sabba I 124
pekkhane = seeing || ver; mirar. disa I 176
perae = crushing; grinding ila VIII 343, khipa I 121, khipa III 235,
(cuikaraa, pisana) || aplastar; moler; khepa VIII 327, cua VIII 302, jua VIII
triturar. 350, nuda I 105, su I 172
pesane = sending || enviar; mandar. cia I 53, pisa VIII 348, lbha VIII 330
pesue = slandering; backbiting sca VIII 293

(pisuabhva) || difamar; calumniar
(cualidad de aquello que crea divisin).
226
227

posane = nourishing || nutrir; alimentar. pusa I 174, pusa V 256, pusa VIII 345,
bhara I 158
plavana-taraesu = floating and tara I 150

crossing || flotar y cruzar, atravesar.
plutagatiya = going jumping devu I 171

(pariplutagamana) || ir a saltos.
pharae = pervading; spreading; going phara I 156

(bypana, gamana) || difundir; propagar;
penetrar; esparcir; expandir; extender;
ir.
phrusse = roughness; harshness rukkha VIII 285

(pharusabhva) || dureza, aspereza.
baddhya = bondage; attachment nisa I 190

(vinibaddha) || esclavitud; apego.
bandhane = binding || atadura; ligazn; ati I 64, 209, adi I 86, 209, kaca I 33, jua
ligar; atar. I 201, taki VIII 283, naha III 240, pasa VIII
346, badha VIII 320, bandha I 109,
mubbi I 124, m I 130, m V 254, sa-
yuja VIII 295, satha VIII 311, si IV 246, si
V 255
bandhe = binding (bandhana) || ligar; kila I 163, ka VIII 297

atar.
balakkre = violence; application of sha I 56

force; overpowering the weak by ones
own power at will (attano balena
yathjjhsaya dubbalassa
abhibhavana) || violencia, uso de
fuerza; subyugar al dbil por medio del
propio poder a voluntad.
227
228

balane hisya ca = ability tuji I 44

(balanakriy) and hurting || habilidad;
capacidad y herir; daar; lastimar.
bala-panesu = force, strength and tujja VIII 294, pisa VIII 345
breathing || fuerza; poder y respirar.
bahutte sadde = loud sound nama I 132

(uggatasadda) || sonido fuerte.
bdhana-phassanesu = afflicting and pasa I 184

touching; contacting || afligir; afectar y
tocar.
bdhane = hindering; afflicting || kilisa I 179

obstruir, obstaculizar; afectar, afligir.
blye paribhsane ca = childhood and laa I 52

abusing; blaming; censuring || niez;
infancia y denostar; reprochar; criticar;
censurar.
bjanikkhepe = sowing || sembrar. vapa I 121
buddhiya = knowing || conocer; esa I 179, pusa I 173

comprender.
bodhane = knowing || conocer; budha I 110, manu VII 263

comprender.
bodhane = knowing (jnana); opening budha III 230

up (vikasana) and awakening
(niddakkhaya) || conocer; comprender;
abrir(se) y despertar.
byattya vcya = articulate speech bhsa I 179

|| lenguaje articulado.
228
229

byattikarae = making manifest, clear or paca I 33

distinct || hacer manifiesto.
byatti-sakhtesu = pervading and akkha I 22

telling || difundir; propagar; penetrar;
esparcir y decir; anunciar.
byathane = hurting (his) || daar; kajja I 43, cakka VIII 282, cukka VIII 282,
lastimar; herir. tuda I 105
byathane majjane ca = hurting and khajja I 43

purity (suddhi) || daar; lastimar; herir y
pureza.
byayagatiya = going to loss or aca I 34

destruction or ruin (vinsagati) || ir
hacia destruccin, prdida o ruina.
byavahre = trading; exchanging; doing paa VIII 305

business || comerciar; intercambiar.
byavahre thutiya ca = trading; paa I 61

exchanging; doing business and
praising || comerciar; intercambiar y
elogiar; alabar.
byjikarae = deceiving (byjikriy) || byca I 31

engaar.
bypane = pervading || difundir; asu IV 246, pa IV 245, skha I 22

propagar; penetrar; esparcir.
brhane = developing; increasing jra I 146

(vahana) || aumentar; crecer;
incrementar.
bhakkhae = eating || comer. khda I 83, khea VIII 297, casa I 184
229
230

bhakkhae hasane ca = eating and jakkha I 23

laughing || comer y rer; sonrer.
bhage = breaking up; dissolution || ruja I 48

disolucin; cesacin.
bhajjane = heating; frying; roasting bhaji I 44

(tpakaraa) || calentar; producir calor;
frer; asar.
bhaane = telling; expounding || decir; bhaa I 60

anunciar; exponer.
bhattiya = devoting; serving || dedicar; bhaa I 53

servir.
bhaya-calanesu = fearing and trembling; vij I 48, vij III 224

moving || temer y temblar; sacudir;
vibrar; mover.
bhaye = fearing || temer. dabh VIII 330, dara I 151, bhisi I 183,
bh I 125 rosa I 184
bharae = bearing; supporting || apoyar; bhui I 58, vala VIII 343

soportar; mantener; sostener; cargar.
bhasmkarae dhrae ca = burning and daha I 195

holding; bearing || quemar; hacer
cenizas y sostener; soportar; mantener.
bhassana-dittsu = speaking (vacana) bhassa I 189

and shining; to be beautiful (sobh) ||
hablar, decir y brillar; belleza;
esplendor.
bhassane = barking (sunakha-bhassana) bukka I 11, bukka VIII 283

|| ladrar.
230
231

bhassane = scolding; frightening || tajja I 44

reprender; asustar; atemorizar.
bhassane = talking; conversing bhassa III 239, laja I 44, lja I 44, bhassa I
(kathana) || hablar; conversar. 174
bhjana-dnesu = dividing; distributing bhja VIII 296

and giving || dividir; distribuir y dar.
bhsane = saying; speaking (udraa) || juta I 66, yuta I 66, laghi VIII 290, vakka
hablar; decir; pronunciar. VIII 282, vaca VIII 293, sakka VIII 282
bhsya = speaking || hablar. kupa VIII 327, kusi VIII 347, gupa VIII
327, ghaa VIII 297, ghai VIII 297, civa
VIII 345, takka VIII 283, tuji VIII 295, tusi
VIII 347, dasi VIII 347, dhpa VIII 327,
nada VIII 313, paa VIII 297, piji VIII 295,
pisi VIII 347, pua VIII 297, putha VIII
311, bhaji VIII 295, bha VIII 302, luji
VIII 295, lua VIII 297, loka VIII 283, loca
VIII 292, vatu VIII 309, vada VIII 314,
vaddha VIII 320, viccha VIII 294
bhijjane = breaking itself || romper(se). bhidi III 226
bhuvi = being; existing || ser; existir. asa I 185
bhsane = ornamenting; decorating || ala I 162

ornamentar; decorar; adornar.
bhsya hasane ca = ornamenting; mai VIII 299

decorating and laughing || ornamentar;
decorar y rer; sonrer.
bhede = breaking; dividing || romper; khaa VIII 350, phala I 164

dividir.
bhojane = eating || comer. asa V 255, vabbha I 127

231
232

makkhane = smearing; anointing || makkha VIII 284

untar; manchar; ungir.
maggana-sakhresu = searching and vaja VIII 295

forming; making || buscar y formar;
hacer.
maggane = searching; seeking || buscar; gavesa VIII 347

rastrear.
majjane = rubbing || frotar. mai I 58
maanya = imagining; regarding || cine I 117

considerar; imaginar.
maane = adorning; decorating maki I 16

(bhsana) || ornamentar; decorar;
adornar.
maale = roundness (parimaalat) || sabi VIII 328

redondez.
made = intoxicating || intoxicar. khivu I 170, gai I 59
made kakkasse ca = intoxicating and kaa I 200

roughness; harshness (kakkasiya,
pharusabhvo) || intoxicar (locura) y
dureza, aspereza.
maddana-saddesu = crushing and gaja VIII 295

making sound || aplastar; triturar y
producir sonido.
maddane = crushing || aplastar; triturar. kici VIII 291, madda I 95
manthe = stirring (viloana) || revolver; khaja I 43, khai I 59

menear; batir.
232
233

mandagatiya = going slowly || ir cupa I 120

lentamente.
mamyane = taking It is mine by kele I 166

attachment or wrong view || hacer mo
(tomar esto es mo) con apego o
concepcin errnea.
mahatte = greatness || grandeza. pula I 168
mne = selfishness, pride (ahakra) || gabba VIII 328

egosmo; arrogancia (lit. hacer yo).
mne = honoring; liking || venerar, mhu I 197

honrar y agradar.
mne = measuring || medir. suppa VIII 326
mne sadde ca = honoring; liking and m I 130

making sound || venerar, honrar; agradar
y producir sonido.
mpane = building; constructing || mpa VIII 327

construir, edificar.
mraa-tosana-nisnesu = killing; I 51
pleasure; joy and sharpening || matar;
complacer; satisfacer; agradar y afilar;
aguzar.
missane gatiya ca = mixing and going yu I 138

|| mezclar e ir.
muccane = being freed || estar libre, ser mokkha I 21

liberado.
233
234

muiypanayana-niyama-bbat- dikkha I 25
desesu = shaving the head, initiating,
restraining, practice and pointing out ||
rapar; iniciar, ordenar; limitar,
restringir; prctica, deber y sealar,
indicar.
methune = coupling; sexual intercourse yabha I 126

(mithunassa janadvayassa ida
kamma) || cpula, unin sexual.
medh-hissu = wisdom and hurting || mida I 97, meda I 97

sabidura y daar; lastimar; herir.
mokkhe = to get released; to get freed || muca III 223

ser liberado.
mocane = setting free; releasing || muca II 213, sida I 95

libertar, liberar, poner en libertad,
soltar.
moha-mucchsu = delusion and fainting muccha I 39

|| ignorancia; engao; ilusin y
desmayo; desvanecimiento.
ycandsu = begging, etc. || pedir; ndha I 109, 210

mendigar; molestia; perturbacin;
dificultad; supremaca y deseo;
esperanza.
ycanya = begging || pedir; attha VIII 311, pattha VIII 311, yca I 34
mendigar.
ycane = begging || pedir; mendigar. dhanu III 231, bhikkha I 24, vata I 67,
vithu I 73,
234
235

ycane = requesting (ajjhesana) || cada I 97

solicitar; pedir.
ycanpatp-issariysssu = begging; ntha I 71, 210

vexation, trouble; supremacy,
domination and wish, hope, desire ||
pedir; mendigar; molestia; perturbacin;
dificultad; supremaca y deseo;
esperanza.
ypane = continued existence yapa VIII 327

(pavattana) || existencia continua
(ininterrumpida).
yuddhe = fighting (yujjhana) || luchar, jaja I 44, jaji I 44, sa-gma VIII 334
pelear.
yoge = connecting || conectar; ligar; yuja II 213

unir.
rakkhae = protecting || proteger; khaji VIII 294, gupa I 120, jasi VIII 345,
cuidar. p I 118, pla VIII 340
rakkhae gatiya ca = protecting and naya I 142

going || proteger e ir.
rakkhya = protecting || proteger; gua I 201

cuidar.
rge = coloring; dyeing; liking || ranja I 45, ranja III 224

color(e)ar, teir; agradar.
rbhasse = acting in excess (kara- rabha I 128

uttariy) || actuar en exceso.
rujya = paining; afflicting || doler; usa I 173, sai I 58, sla I 164
afligir.
235
236

ruj-visaraa-gatyvasnesu = paining, saa I 52

afflicting, oppressing (p); spreading;
pervading (vippharaa) and end of
going; standing (gatiy avasna
osna abhvakaraa) || doler, afligir,
oprimir; extender, difundir, propagar,
penetrar, esparcir y fin del movimiento,
pararse, estar parado.
ruppane = changing (kuppana); striking rpa III 233

(ghaana); oppressing (pana) ||
cambiar; golpear; oprimir, subyugar,
someter.
rpakriyya = making manifest rpa VIII 323

(paksanakriy) || hacer manifiesto.
roge = aging (jararoga) || envejecer. jara I 150
roge = ailing; illness || enfermedad; ama VIII 333

dolencia.
rocane = liking (ruci) || agradar, deleitar. ruca III 222
rosane = making angry (kopakaraa) || rusa VIII 346

enojar; irritar.
rohane = rising; growing || levantar(se), mla VIII 342

subir; crecer.
lakkhae = marking (saa) || marca, aki I 16, aki VIII 281

seal.
laghane = jumping; hopping || saltar, lagha VIII 290

brincar.
lajjane = becoming shameful; being lajja I 49

ashamed || estar avergonzado.
236
237

lajjya = being ashamed || estar hare I 154

avergonzado.
lajjya codane ca = shame and viria III 241

inciting; rousing || vergenza e incitar,
instigar; provocar.
lambane = hanging || colgar. pu VIII 327
lavana-pavanesu = cutting (chedana) pala VIII 344, mla VIII 344

and cleansing; cleaning (sodhana) ||
cortar y limpiar; purificar.
lbhe = gaining; acquiring || obtener; labha I 129, vida II 215, vida VIII 312,
adquirir; ganar. vidi I 105
limpane = smearing; staining || untar; lipa II 216

ensuciar; manchar.
lekhane = writing || escribir. likha I 23
loliye = unsteadiness; fickleness kaka I 16

(lolabhva) || inestabilidad;
inconstancia; volubilidad.
vase = lineage || linaje. gottha I 74
vacane gati-kampanesu ca = saying; ra I 154

going and trembling || decir; ir y
temblar; vibrar.
vaa-gatsu = color and going || color e soa I 60

ir.
vajiranibbese = thundering || tronar, buja I 43

sonido de tormenta.
237
238

vajjane = avoiding || evitar; abstener(se) jugi I 28, yugi I 28, vajja VIII 294
de.
vahane = growing; increasing || brha I 198, vaha I 59

crecer; aumentar.
vaa-kriy-vitthra-gua-vacanesu = vaa VIII 299

praising (pasas), doing (karaa),
extending (vitthinnat), quality of
morality, etc. (sldidhamma) and
speaking (vc) || elogiar, alabar; hacer;
extender, expandir; cualidad de la
moralidad, etc. y hablar.
vae = color || color. kava I 170, nla I 163
vae = white color (setavaa) || color sita I 67

blanco.
vattane = being; existing || ser; existir. vatu I 67
vadanasayoge = kissing || besar (lit. cubi I 123

unin de caras).
vadanekadese = a part of the mouth; gai I 58

action of the mouth || parte de la boca;
accin de la boca.
vaddhane = growing; increasing || vaddha I 109

crecer; aumentar, incrementar.
vandannatiya = bowing down namassa I 172

(vandansakhta namana) || hacer
reverencia inclinar(se).
vamane = vomiting || vomitar; expeler. chadda VIII 312
vayohnimhi = aging || envejecer. jara VIII 336
238
239

varae = restraining (savaraa) || rukkha I 23, vakkha I 23, vara I 154

controlar; restringir; contener.
vasane = living || residir, habitar, vivir. ri III 238
vasane = to clothe || arropar, vestir. cila I 169
vass-varaesu = raining and covering; kaa I 52

obstructing || llover y cubrir; obstruir.
vkyapabandhe = connecting sentences; katha VIII 311

composition || conectar o relacionar
oraciones; composicin.
vrae = obstructing; hindering tsa VIII 347

(nivraa) || obstruir; obstaculizar.
vikasana-bhedesu = blooming; opening; phulla I 165

expanding and breaking; dividing ||
florecer; abrir(se); expandir(se) y
romper; dividir.
vikasane = blooming; opening; puppha I 122, phua I 54

expanding || expandir(se); florecer;
abrir(se).
vikirae vidhunane ca = scattering and phua I 62

shaking || esparcir, diseminar,
desparramar, dispersar y temblar;
sacudir.
vikkantiya = exerting; striving vra VIII 336, sra VIII 336

(vikkamana) || esforzar(se).
vikhyne = to be manifest || paha I 57

manifestacin.
239
240

vijjopdne = acquiring knowledge; sikkha I 24

learning || adquirir conocimiento;
aprender, estudiar.
vijjhane = piercing || perforar; atravesar; raji I 48, vidha III 231

penetrar.
vitakke = thinking; reflecting || pensar; ha I 197, takka VIII 281, sama VIII 333
reflexionar.
vitakke vidhimhi chedane ca = thinking, kappa VIII 323

doing and cutting || pensar; reflexionar;
hacer y cortar.
vittiyoge = happiness || felicidad. mada VIII 312
vitthre = spreading; enlarging || tanu VII 261, paci VIII 292, pasa I 183,
extender; expandir; agrandar; ampliar. puthu I 74
vidrae = rending; splitting || hende(i)r, dala VIII 343, dara I 158, bhidhi II 214
partir; rajar; rasgar.
viddhasane = demolishing; destroying vambha VIII 330

|| demoler; destruir.
vidhimhi = doing (kriy) || hacer; kappa VIII 323

accin; acto.
vidhnane = trembling; shaking || khamya I 144, dh I 107

temblar; sacudir.
vinse = destruction; ruin; loss || luja III 225

destruccin; prdida; ruina.
vinindane = reproaching || reprochar, garaha VIII 350

criticar; censurar.
vippayoge = separation || separacin. visa V 256
240
241

vibdhane = hindering; obstructing || kilisa V 255

obstruir, obstaculizar; afectar.
vibdhya = oppressing; harming || eha I 57, heha I 57

oprimir; obstruir; daar, lastimar.
vibhajane = dividing; separating || vaa VIII 297

dividir; separar.
vibhjane = dividing || dividir; separar. vai I 54
vibhede = dividing || dividir. cua VIII 297, pua VIII 297, phua VIII
297
viyattiya vcya = articulate speech gada I 84, cakkha I 26, cikkha I 26, paha
|| lenguaje articulado. I 56, br I 145, lapa VIII 323, vaca I 31,
vada I 97, saca I 33
viyojana-sampajjanesu = separating and rica VIII 293

succeeding || separar y tener xito;
lograr.
vimohane = delusion || ignorancia; lubha I 129

engao; ilusin.
vimhpane = making others astonished; kuha VIII 350

pretending || asombrar; sorprender;
aparentar; fingir; engaar.
virecane = purging || purgar. rica II 213
vilsane = to be graceful || encantar, vala I 169

embelesar, atraer, cautivar.
vilse = charm; grace; dallying || laa I 200

encanto; gracia; belleza; coquetera,
coquetear.
241
242

vilimpane = anointing; smearing || opuji I 49

ungir; untar; manchar.
vilnabhve = dissolution || disolucin; vil III 238

destruccin.
vilekhane = scratching || rayar; escribir. kasa I 173, phla I 167, rada I 84
vilohane = hurting || herir; lastimar; matha I 74, lua I 53

matar.
viloane = stirring || revolver; menear; ghu I 197, bdha I 108, mattha I 71,
batir. mantha I 71
visaddane = shouting (ugghosana) || ghusi VIII 346

gritar; vocear.
visaraa-gatyvasnesu = pervading; sda I 95

spreading (vippharaa) and sitting down
(nisdana) || difundir; propagar;
penetrar; esparcir; expandir; extender y
visarae = splitting; bursting; spreading; dala I 162, da I 200, dha I 200, phala I
pervading || partir; separar; rajar; 162, phucha I 39, phua I 54,
abrir(se); romper(se); extender;
difundir; propagar; penetrar; esparcir.
visarae duggandhe ca = spreading py I 143

(vippharaa) and bad smell || extender;
difundir; propagar; penetrar; esparcir y
mal olor.
visesane = distinguishing || distinguir; acu VIII 292

calificar; especificar.
242
243

vissagga-parissajjan-abbhukkiraesu = saja VIII 292, I 48

relinquishing, abandoning; embracing
and sprinkling || abandonar, renunciar;
abrazar y rociar, asperjar.
vissse = confidence; trusting || confiar. bhaja VIII 295, sambha I 129
vihyasagatiya gamanamatte ca = i I 57
flying and mere going || ir por el aire
(volar) y mero ir.
vihre = sporting || jugar; recrear(se). ka I 200
vmasya = investigating || mna I 113

investigar.
vuddhiya = increasing; growing || idha III 231, dahi I 196, pyi I 144, pe I
crecer; aumentar. 120, phyi I 144, bahi I 196, maha I 196,
vaha I 196
vuddhiya lbhe ca = increasing, edha I 108

growing and gaining, acquiring || crecer;
aumentar y adquirir; ganar; obtener.
vuddhiya sadde ca = increasing; bahi I 196

growing and making sound || crecer;
aumentar y producir sonido.
vuddhiya sghatte ca = increasing; dakkha I 25

growing and quickness || crecer;
aumentar y rapidez.
vekkhane = observing; looking; vekkha I 22

investigating || observar; investigar;
considerar.
vecitte = mental confusion || confusin. muha III 240
243
244

vehane = wrapping; enveloping || he I 55, mai I 58, vai I 58, veha I 57,
envolver; cubrir. hea I 201
vedhane = piercing || perforar; atravesar; kui VIII 299, vaa I 52

penetrar.
velambe = hanging down (vilam- kadi I 95, ala I 167, ula I 167, thama I
babhva) || colgar. 133, sama I 133
sakilesane = afflicting; defiling; pua I 54

smearing || afligir; afectar; ensuciar;
manchar; contaminar.
sakilese = defiling; inflicting || luha I 57

ensuciar; manchar; contaminar; infligir.
saghte = accumulating; collecting || ghaa I 53, jaa I 53

sapaccana-koilla-paikkama- kuca I 30
vilekhanesu = uniting; crookedness;
going back and scratching; writing ||
unir; deshonestidad; regresar; retroceder
y rayar; escribir.
sapke = cooking well || cocinar bien; paca I 34

cocer.
sayamane = restraining; abstaining || pacca VIII 293, yuja VIII 295

abstener(se).
sayame = restraining || controlar; vadha VIII 319

sardhane = accomplishing || lograr; sidhu III 231

terminar, consumar; realizar.
244
245

savarae = restraining; protecting khaa VIII 297, guh I 197, chada VIII
(rakkhaa) || controlar; restringir; 312, dvara I 150, taca I 30, thaga I 28,
contener; proteger. bua I 201, bye I 139, vu IV 246, sua I
201
savehane = surrounding; wrapping; mura I 156

enveloping || envolver; cubrir;
circundar.
sasagge = uniting (ekatokaraa) || muda VIII 313, yua VIII 297

unir.
sasandane = discussing || discutir. kitta VIII 308
sasiddhiya = succeeding; rdha III 231, rdha IV 245, sdha III 231,
accomplishing || tener xito; lograr; sdha IV 245
consiguir; consumar; realizar.
sasuddhiya = purity || pureza; majja I 47

purificacin.
saharise = binding (vinibaddhakriy) || baddha I 108

ligar; atar.
saharise = knocking against; colliding ghasu I 174

(saghaana) || golpear contra; chocar.
sakya = doubting || dudar. ragi I 28, reka I 16, saki I 16
sakocane = contracting; distorting || kuca I 31, kua VIII 302, cua VIII 302,
contraer (reducir); encoger; torcer; yanta VIII 308
deformar.
sakhate = making || hacer, construir, makkha I 22

crear.
245
246

sakhne bandhumhi ca = calculating kula I 168

and relative; relation || contar; calcular y
pariente, familiar; relacin.
sakhra-gatsu = forming; making and saha VIII 298

going || formar, hacer e ir.
sakhyne = calculating || contar; kala I 166, gaa VIII 303

calcular.
sage = attachment; clinging (lagana) || saja III 224, sanja I 44

apego, adhesin.
sage sakya = attachment; clinging laga I 28

and doubting || apego, adhesin y dudar.
saghte = accumulating; collecting || asa VIII 348, ghaa VIII 296, apa VIII
acumular; juntar; agregar. 326, ipa VIII 326, pai VIII 299, pii I
58, pua VIII 302, pua I 201, pula I 164,
muttha VIII 311, siloka I 16, siloa I 61,
soa I 61, hui I 58
saghe hantyatthe ca = accumulating; ghaa VIII 297

collecting and striking; killing ||
acumular; juntar; agregar y golpear,
pegar; matar.
sajjane = clinging; attachment; making; misa VIII 348, sajja VIII 295, sulla VIII
preparing || apego, adhesin; hacer; 343
preparar.
sacalane = agitating || agitar; sacudir; khubha I 129, khubha III 236

vibrar.
246
247

sacale pharae ca = trembling, shaking phula I 169

and pervading; spreading || temblar;
sacudir y difundir; propagar; penetrar;
esparcir; extender.
sacinane = accumulating || acumular. khala I 165
sacuane = grinding; crushing || mua VIII 296

moler; aplastar; triturar.
sacetane = urging || incitar, instigar. cita VIII 307
sacodane attiya ca = accusing and cuda VIII 312

ordering; commanding || acusar y
ordenar, mandar.
sae = making a mark (cihana, cit I 63

lakkhaakaraa) || marca, seal; marcar.
sattya = being; existing bh I 202, vida III 227, h I 191, 202

(vijjamnkra) || ser; existir; estar.
sattibandhane = enabling vassu VIII 346

(samatthatkaraa) || hacer capaz,
posible; capacitar.
sattiya = ability (samatthabhva) || saka VII 262, saha III 240, suha III 240
satthe magalye ca = instructing, sidhu I 108

teaching (ssana) and destroying evil
(ppavinsana), cause of growth
(vuddhikraa) || instruir, ensear y
destruir el mal, causa para el
crecimiento.
saddakucchya = coughing || toser. ksa I 181
247
248

saddakucchiya = belly sound; sadhu I 109

flatulence || sonido del vientre;
flatulencia.
sadd-aggisayogesu = making sound dhama I 132

and starting a fire by blowing || producir
sonido y encender un fuego soplar.
saddatthe = making sound || producir kuji I 44, gaja I 44, gajja I 44, muji I 44
sonido.
saddane = making a noise || producir un sadda VIII 313

ruido.
sadda-sakhtesu = making sound and he I 55

telling || producir sonido y decir;
anunciar.
sadda-sagh(t)esu = making sound the I 68, 209, dhe I 209, pia I 53

and accumulating; collecting || producir
sonido y acumular; juntar; agregar.
sadd-usshesu = making sound (rava) deka I 16, dheka I 16

and striving (vyama) || producir sonido
y esforzar(se).
248
249

sadde = making sound || producir aa I 59, abi I 124, abhi I 127, u I 12, 209,
sonido. kaa I 59, kanuy I 144, ku I 10, 209, ke I
10, 208, khu I 19, 209, gadda I 86, gu I
28, 209, ge I 26, 208, ge IV 245, ghu I 29,
209, ghusa I 172, ghusa VIII 349, jana I
113, tusa I 175, thana I 112, dabi I 124,
dabhi I 127, debha I 127, dhana I 112,
dhana VIII 321, dhisa I 189, nadda I 86,
nsu I 182, pana I 112, bhaa I 59, maa I
59, raa I 59, rasa I 175, rsu I 182, ru I
145, 209, re 145, I208, vaa I 59, vasa III
239, via I 53, sama I 133, suna I 113,
hasa I 175, hisa I 175
sadde akkose ca = making sound and kura I 156

insulting; abusing || producir sonido e
insultar; agraviar.
sadde tre = very high sound kuca I 30

(accuccasadda) || sonido muy fuerte.
sadde rose ca = making sound and anger masa I 176, misa I 176
|| producir sonido y enojo; ira.
saddopakarae = component of a sound; kua I 61

making sound || componente (parte) de
un sonido; producir sonido.
saddopatpesu = making sound and tanu VIII 322, sara I 149

tormenting || producir sonido y
atormentar.
santajjane = frightening; menacing || tajja VIII 295, tassa VIII 346

asustar; atemorizar; amenazar.
249
250

santnakriyya = doing satta VIII 309

uninterruptedly (pabandhakriy,
avicchedakaraa) || hacer, realizar
ininterrumpidamente.
santna-planesu = continuity and tyu I 144

protecting || continuidad y proteger;
cuidar.
santne = expanding; continuing || ri I 145, vapa I 120

continuar, continuidad; expandir.
santpe = heating || calentar; producir tapa I 122, tapa III 235, dhpa I 122
calor.
santhambhe = supporting || apoyar; gantha VIII 311, dbha VIII 330, santha
sostener; soportar. VIII 311
santharae = spreading; covering || thara I 158

extender; expandir; cubrir.
sandpana-kilesana-jvanesu = shining, dhikkha I 23, dhukkha I 23

defiling and living || brillar; ensuciar;
manchar; contaminar; vivir; existir.
sandpane = shining; showing clearly || d VIII 314

brillar; exponer, mostrar claramente.
sandhimhi = connecting; uniting || sa-dh III 231

conectar; ligar; unir.
samavye = combination; coming uca III 223, sapa I 120

together || combinacin; juntar(se),
reunir(se).
250
251

samdhimhi = putting together; nisa I 176, yuja III 224

unification of mind (samdhna,
cittekaggat) || unificacin de la mente;
concentracin.
samdhimhi = putting correctly; sla I 163

coordinating || colocar correctamente;
coordinar.
samiddhiya = success; prosperity || nanda I 90

xito; prosperidad.
samiddhiya hildane dittiya ca = cadi I 90

success, prosperity; flirting and
splendor, beauty; shining || xito;
prosperidad; flirtear; coquetear y brillar;
esplendor; belleza.
samussaye = height (roha, ubbedho) || thpa VIII 326

altura; elevacin.
sampahre = striking; fighting || yudha I 110, yudha III 231

golpear; pegar; luchar; pelear.
samphasse = touching; contacting || phusa I 189

tocar.
sambandhe = connecting; binding tight nakkha VIII 284, you I 52, samba VIII
(dahabandhana) || conectar; ligar. 328
sambhattiya = serving || servir. vana I 113, sana I 113
sambhame = instability (anavahna) || tara I 150

inestabilidad.
sammisse = mixing || mezclar. missa VIII 348
sayane = sleeping || dormir. supa I 121
251
252

saye = lying; sleeping || dormir; s I 172

acostarse.
savane = flowing (sandana) || fluir, su I 172

correr.
savane = hearing || or. kaa VIII 304, su IV 241
sahane = enduring || soportar; aguantar; khamu I 133

tolerar.
staccagamane = going constantly ata I 64

(nirantaragamana) || ir continuamente.
stacce = continuity (satatabhva) || kanda VIII 313

continuidad.
sdane = enjoying || disfrutar; gozar de. sada I 95
smatthiye = ability (samatthabhva) || om I 131, kapu I 120, rgha I 29, lgha I

habilidad; capacidad. 29, saka IV 244
sinehana-ched-vaharaesu = sticking; vasa VIII 347

cutting and stealing (corikya gahaa)
|| aglutinar, pegar; cortar y robar, hurtar.
sinehane = joy (pti) || alegra; regocijo. mida VIII 312
sinehane = sticking || aglutinar, pegar. tila I 169, tila VIII 340, mida III 228, mila
I 169, rasa VIII 348, vasa I 179, sineha
VIII 349
sineha-savana-praesu = oil, sticking; pusa V 256

hearing and filling || aceite, aglutinar,
pegar; or, escuchar y llenar; completar.
silghya = praising (pasas) || kattha I 73, thoma VIII 311, 332, saha
elogiar; alabar. VIII 298, haa I 200
252
253

silesana-kanesu = adhering and lasa I 175

playing; sporting || adherir, pegar y
jugar; recrear(se).
silesane = adhering || adherir; pegar. silesa VIII 345
silese = adhering; sticking || adherir; l V 254

pegar.
silyayoge = dancing (lsiya); playing a lasa VIII 346

drama (nakanana) || danzar;
representar un drama.
stiye = coolness; calmness (stibhva) || sidi I 91

frescura; tranquilidad, serenidad.
sti-sevanesu = coolness and sabhja VIII 295

associating; serving || frescura y asociar;
servir; asistir.
sukhane = happiness || felicidad. pua I 201, mua I 201
sukhe abyattasadde ca = happiness and hildi I 94

inarticulate sound || felicidad; bienestar;
placer y sonido inarticulado.
suttajanane = making a thread; spinning kati I 67

|| hacer un hilo; hilar.
suddhiya = purity || pureza; d III 226, niji I 47

purificacin.
supane = sleeping || dormir. d III 226
susane = being dry || estar, estar seco, sasa I 185

sequedad.
253
254

scane addane = showing (paksana) gandha VIII 319

and drowning (pariplut) || mostrar;
indicar y flotar.
secane = sprinkling; pouring || rociar, ukkha I 23, kaa I 201, kevu I 171, khevu
asperjar; vert(e)ir. I 171, gara I 150, gilevu I 171, gevu I
171, ghara I 150, jisu I 174, nisu I 174,
milevu I 171, misu I 174, miha I 195,
mevu I 171, vassa I 174, visu I 174, seca I
33, sevu I 171
secane sahane ca = sprinkling and marisu I 174

enduring || rociar, asperjar; vertir y
soportar, aguantar; tolerar.
sehille = looseness; weakness (sihila- cilla I 165, satha I 73

bhva) || flojedad; laxitud; relajacin;
debilidad.
sethille = looseness; weakness || kattara VIII 310

flojedad; laxitud; relajacin; debilidad.
sevya = associating; serving || bhaja I 47, si I 171, si VI 259

asociar(se); servir.
seane = whistling || silbar. sia VIII 350
soke = grieving; sorrowing || lamentar; kahi VIII 298, kuhi I 57, maha I 57,
sentir pesar. suca I 30
soceyylakresu = purity and majja VIII 295

decorating; ornamenting || purificacin,
pureza y decorar; ornamentar.
soceyye = purifying; cleaning; purity khala VIII 341, nh III 240, sudha III 231
(sucibhva) || pureza; purificacin;
purificar; limpiar.
254
255

sodhane = cleansing (pariyodpana) || d III 225, de I 82

limpiar; purificar; depurar.
sosanlamatthesu = making dry and to okha I 21, dkha I 21, dhkha I 21, rkha
be able; to suffice; to adorn; to prevent || I 21, lkha I 21
secar y ser capaz, poder; ser suficiente;
adornar; prevenir.
sosane = making dry || secar. pe I 120, ve I 170, suhi I 57, suhi VIII
298, susa III 240
snehe = sticking (vassakhto sneho); mida I 94

liking (ptisneho) || aglutinar, pegar;
agradar.
svntane mantane = compromising; sma VIII 334

use of kind and friendly words
(smappayoga) and calling (avhyana,
pakkosana) || transigir, transar,
concordar; emplear lenguaje cordial y
amistoso y llamar, convocar.
haraa-dittsu = carrying and shining || kusu III 238

llevar; transportar y brillar.
harae = existing; being (pavattana) || hara I 152

existir; ser.
harite = being green; being fresh || estar paa VIII 304

verde; estar fresco.
hasane = laughing (hsa) || rer; sonrer. kakkha I 21, kakha I 23, jaggha I 29, taka
I 11, hasa I 175
hniya = decrease; loss || prdida; rasa I 175

disminucin; reduccin.
255
256

hvakarae = flirting; dalliance cua I 58, culla I 164, hila I 169

(vilsakaraa) || flirtear; coquetear.
hse = laughing (hasana); liking; dapa III 235, muda I 92

satisfaction (tuhi) || rer; sonrer;
agradar; satisfacer; satisfaccin.
hisatthe = hurting || daar; lastimar; ubbi I 123, kasa I 174, jasa I 174, jusa I
herir. 174, jhasa I 174, tubbi I 123, thaha I 198,
thubbi I 123, daha I 198, disa I 174,
dubbi I 123, dhubbi I 123, masa I 174,
ysa I 174, vasa I 174, sisa I 174
his-karaa-vyamanesu = hurting; -rabha I 128

doing and striving || daar; lastimar;
herir; hacer y esforzar(se).
his-gati-dassanesu = hurting, going sa I 179

and seeing || daar; lastimar; herir; ir y
ver.
his-gatsu = hurting and going || dakkha I 26, hana I 113

daar; lastimar; herir e ir.
his-gandhesu = hurting and smelling cat I 67

|| daar; lastimar; herir y oler.
his-takkalagandhesu = hurting and kapu I 120

smell of resin || daar; lastimar; herir y
olor de resina.
hisndaresu = hurting and disrespect tadi II 215

|| daar; lastimar; herir y falta de
respeto.
256
257

his-bala-dna-niketanesu = hurting; tuji VIII 294, piji VIII 294, saa VIII 297
force, strength; giving and living
(nivsa) || herir; daar; lastimar; fuerza;
hisya = hurting || daar; lastimar; adda VIII 314, katha I 73, kasa I 184,
herir. ktha VIII 311, ki IV 244, kivi IV 246,
kutha I 73, khiu VII 263, khuu VII 263,
ciri IV 246, jasa VIII 346, jiri IV 246,
tacca I 30, tadda I 86, tika IV 246, tiga IV
246, tuja I 44, tupa I 120, tupha I 122,
tubha I 129, dsa IV 246, dikkha IV 246,
du IV 246, du V 249, nabha I 129, pua
VIII 297, budhi VIII 319, bhabba I 123,
mia I 61, m V 253, radha III 231, risa I
189, ruja VIII 295, rusa I 189 , lsa VIII
345, varaha VIII 349, v V 254, sagha IV
246, sabhu I 125, sambhu I 125, sasu I
176, su V 255, sutha I 73, hana III 233,
hisa I 172, hikka VIII 283, hisi II 216,
hisi VIII 347
hisya thutiya ca = hurting and sa-sa I 176

praising || daar; lastimar; herir y
elogiar; alabar.
hisya bhsane ca = hurting and sumbha I 125

saying; talking || daar; lastimar; herir y
decir; hablar.
hisya sagame ca = hurting and medha I 109

meeting; associating || daar; lastimar;
herir y reunin; asociacin.
257
258

his-sakilesesu = hurting and kuthi I 71, piha I 56, puthi I 71, luthi I 71
defiling || daar; lastimar; herir y
ensuciar; manchar; contaminar.
his-sakilesesu ketave ca = hurting; saha I 56

defiling; inflicting and cheating;
deceiving || daar; lastimar; herir y
ensuciar; manchar; contaminar; infligir
y fraude; engaar.
hucchane = crookedness (koilla) || dhra I 150

deshonestidad; cualidad de torcido.
258
259
INDEX
(NDICE)
asaacca 1 kusiketa 27 chuajajjha 53 disadu 79

accaaa 2 kelekhajja 28 jaajala 54 dudubbi 80
ahianu-rudha 3 khaakhanu 29 jalajgara 55 dulade 81
anu-vi-dhama 4 khandakhala 30 jijva 56 dekadvara 82
amaasa 5 khalakhi 31 jujua 57 dhakadhama 83
asa-bhuja 6 khijakhipa 32 juajhasa 58 dharadha 84
-rabhaidha 7 khipakhuda 33 jheika 59 dhikkhadhukkha 85
ilaja 8 khudikhepa 34 ulai 60 dhubbidhe 86
dukha 9 khelugai 35 itakka 61 dhekanaa 87
ucaudi 10 gaigantha 36 takkhataa 62 natanamu 88
uddhasana 11 gandhagaraha 37 taitapa 63 nayantha 89
yokha 12 garahagidhu 38 tapatala 64 ndhanidi 90
oakakha 13 giragucu 39 tasatika 65 nidapin 91
kakhikaha 14 gujigua 40 tigatila 66 npakka 92
kaakatha 15 geghaa 41 tivatuji 67 pacapaa 93
kathakadda 16 ghaaghiu 42 tujjatubbi 68 paapata 94
kanakappa 17 ghughusa 43 tubhate 69 patapara 95
kappakala 18 ghusacacca 44 thakathala 70 parap 96
kaladikassa 19 caccacadi 45 thahathla 71 ppia 97
kaakita 20 capacaha 46 thedakkha 72 pihapisi 98
kitakilota 21 cyucita 47 dakkhadabhi 73 pisipu 99
kivikuca 22 citciva 48 dabhdala 74 pucchapua 100
kucakuca 23 civucui 49 daliddad 75 putthapubba 101
kuakui 24 cuacura 50 ddsu 76 purapusa 102
kuakupa 25 cullachadi 51 dhudipha 77 pusapra 103
kupakusa 26 chadchua 52 divudisa 78 priphara 104
259
260
phalaphua 105 mudam 126 vakavacu 147 sambhusala 168

phuaphusa 106 mlamevu 127 vacuvaha 148 salas 169
badabila 107 mokkhayata 128 vaavada 149 ssdha 170
biabudhi 108 yatayasu 129 vadavapa 150 sdhasi 171
bundibyca 109 yyuja 130 vapavaraha 151 sisia 172
byusabhaja 110 yujarakkha 131 varahavasa 152 sitasiniha 173
bhajabhaa 111 rakharadha 132 vasavaha 153 sinehasivu 174
bhadibhassa 112 ranjarasa 133 vaajiva 154 sisasla 175
bhassabhsa 113 rasardha 134 vicchavida 155 susuca 176
bhsubh 114 rdharica 135 vidavil 156 suasuppa 177
bhmakkha 115 risaruca 136 visavu 157 subhas 178
makhamajja 116 rujarudhi 137 vulaveu 158 ssla 179
majjamattha 117 rudhirosa 138 velasa-yuja 159 sehaa 180
mathamana 118 rojalagha 139 sa-sasa-gma160 hadahara 181
manamarisu 119 lajalabi 140 sacasaa 161 hariyahi 182
malamaha 120 labhal 141 saasaha 162 hisahisi 183
mahamhu 121 lkhaliha 142 sahasatta 163 hah 184
mimile 122 llui 143 sattasadda 164 hehahoa 185
milechamiha 123 luilupa 144 sadhusanda 165
mmua 124 lubiloca 145 sapasama 166
muamuda 125 locavagga 146 samasambhu 167
260
261
VENERABLE U SILANANDA is the abbot of Dhammananda Vihara, Half Moon

Bay, California, and the spiritual director of Centro Mexicano del Buddhismo
Theravada A. C. He was chosen by the renowned Burmese meditation
master, the Most Venerable Mahasi Sayadaw, to teach and spread the
Buddhist teachings in North America.
Venerable U Silananda has been a Buddhist monk for over fifty years. He
holds two titles of Master in Dhamma and had taught at the Atithokdayone
Pali University and served as the external examiner at the Department of
Oriental Studies, The University of Arts and Sciences, Mandalay, Myanmar.
He also was the chief compiler of the comprehensive Tipitaka Pali-Burmese
Dictionary and one of the final editors of the Pali Texts, Commentaries, and
Sub-Commentaries at the Sixth Buddhist Council, held in the Rangoon,
Myanmar, in 1954. He is the author of seven books in Burmese and in English
of the Four Foundations of Mindfulness published by Wisdom Publications in
1990.
Since coming to the United States of America in 1979, Venerable U Silananda

has been teaching insight meditation and Abhidhamma (Buddhist
psychology), and leading courses and retreats throughout the country, in
Canada, Mexico, Japan, Malaysia, Singapore, and Jamaica. He teaches from
an extraordinary depth of knowledge, communicating in clear and precise
English. In 1993 he was awarded by the government of Myanmar with the
title of Agga-Maha-Pandita in recognition for his achievements. He is loved
by his students as a skilled, patient, and compassionate teacher.
261

Pali Roots in Saddaniti by Venerable U Silananda1

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Pali Roots in Saddaniti by Venerable U Silananda1

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

PALI ROOTS

Electronic version 1.0

Last updated: Monday, January 21, 2002

Introduction ........................................ v-xiii

Guide to Pali Roots .................. xiv-xvi

Abbreviations .......................... xvii

Pali Roots in Saddanti Dhtu-Ml

Meaning of Pali Roots ............... 186-258

Why this book?

1. Ariyaka (Vinaya Piaka, i. 33, Samantapsdik, i. 220),

Saddanti and its Author

Pi and Sanskrit roots

1. Bhvdi Gaa ap (a)

7. Rudhdi Gaa nam (nam)

But in Pi, roots are divided into 7 or 8 Gaas as follows:

In Pi grammatical treatises such as N ysa and Rpasiddhi (both commentaries on

Sothelinesreadlikethissentenceinthosemanuscripts. To make matters worse these manuscripts

These errors can be classified as follows:

1. Those apparently made by the author himself, and

For type-1 errors: dhakhi, ghu abhigamane, kuda-khuda-guda, d sandpane, labha

For type-4 errors: dikkha muiyopanayananiyabbatdesesu, maci dhraucchya-

GUIDE TO PALI ROOTS

# GROUP TOTAL CONJUGATIONAL REMARKS

I BHVDIGAA 1110 a ..........

II RUDHDIGAA 18 -a to be inserted after first

III DIVDIGAA 104 ya ..........

IV SVDIGAA 30 u, , u is not an indicatory letter

VI GAHDIGAA 10 ppa, h ..........

VII TANDIGAA 14 o, yira ..........

VIII CURDIGAA 399 e, aya indicates strengthening of

Guide to Pali Roots

ROOT AND ROOT MEANING FROM

asa saghte = accumulating; VIII asa samghte X 371

aka kuilagatiya = moving I 12, ak a kuily gatau I 829

aki lakkhae = marking; mark || I 16 ak i lakae I 87

aki lakkhae = marking VIII aka pade lakae ca X 382

akkha byattisakhtesu = perva- I 22 ak vyptau I 684

A ROOT IS A PRIMITIVE ELEMENT OF THE LANGUAJE

# STEPS EXAMPLE # STEPS EXAMPLE

Y (GOING-GROUP I, III) 2 ELIDE LAST VOWEL PAC

a, , i, , u, , e, o, , k, kh, g, gh, , c, ch, j, jh, , , h, , h, , t, th, d, dh, n, p, ph,

Abhidhnappadpik k, Moggallna. Sixth Buddhist Council, Yangon, 1964.

Saddantippakaraa-Dhtuml, Aggavasa. Sixth Buddhist Council Edition

asa saghte = accumulating; VIII asa samghte X 371

aka kuilagatiya = moving I 12, ak a kuily gatau I 829

aki lakkhae = marking; mark || I 16 ak i lakae I 87

aki lakkhae = marking (saa) VIII aka pade lakae ca X 382

akkha byatti-sakhtesu = pervading I 22 ak vyptau I 684

aga kuilya gatiya = moving I 210 ag a kuily gatau I 830

agi gamane = going || ir. I 27 ag i gatyartha I 155

agga kuilagatiya = going I 28 ag a kuily gatau I 830

agha ppakarae = doing evil || VIII agh a ppe K.,

acca pjya = venerating; I 30 arc a pjym I 219

acca pjya = venerating; VIII arc a pjym X 266

achi yme = stretching; extending I 39 ch i yme I 224

aja khepane gatiya ca = I 43 aj a gati-kepaayo I 248

ajja ajjane = procuring; acquiring I 43 arj a arjane I 242

ajja paisajjane = forming; making VIII arj a prayatne X 186

aca byayagatiya = going to loss I 34 ac u gatau ycane ca I 915

acu gati-pjansu = going and I 30 ac u gati-pjanayo I 203

acu visesane = distinguishing || VIII ac u vieae X 198

aa gatiya = going || ir. I 53 a a gatau I 317

aa andare = disrespect || falta de VIII a a andare X 25

ahi gatiya = going || ir. I 57 ah i gatau I 280